Cheerful Choices

  • About
  • Recipes
    • High Protein Choices
    • Meal Prep Choices
    • 5 Ingredients or Less
    • Breakfast Choices
    • Snack Choices
    • Main Dish Choices
    • Sweet Treat Choices
    • Vegetarian Choices
  • Coaching + Cooking
  • Partner with Me
  • Media
  • Contact
menu icon
go to homepage
  • About
  • Recipes
    • High Protein Choices
    • Meal Prep Choices
    • 5 Ingredients or Less
    • Breakfast Choices
    • Snack Choices
    • Main Dish Choices
    • Sweet Treat Choices
    • Vegetarian Choices
  • Coaching + Cooking
  • Partner with Me
  • Media
  • Contact
search icon
Homepage link
  • About
  • Recipes
    • High Protein Choices
    • Meal Prep Choices
    • 5 Ingredients or Less
    • Breakfast Choices
    • Snack Choices
    • Main Dish Choices
    • Sweet Treat Choices
    • Vegetarian Choices
  • Coaching + Cooking
  • Partner with Me
  • Media
  • Contact
×

Sushi Bake

January 3, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 6 Comments

This Sushi Bake is a fun twist on the classic sushi roll we all adore. It's a baked, deconstructed version of sushi, offering the same great flavors in a comforting, casserole-style dish. Plus, you get to customize with any sauce of your choice.

Sushi bake in a pan garnished with avocado and green onions.

Disclosure: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. Thanks so much for your support! See my disclosure policy for more details.

Table of Contents

  • Why you'll love it
  • Is sushi healthy?
  • What ingredients do you need?
  • How do you make this sushi casserole?
    • Prepare the sushi rice
    • Mix the salmon
    • Assemble and bake
    • Prepare the spicy mayo
    • Garnish with veggies and mayo
    • Serve with seaweed
  • What salmon should I use?
  • Recipe tips and tricks
  • Customize it your way
  • Can you make it ahead of time?
  • How do I store leftovers?
  • Want more? Try these other salmon recipes:

Why you'll love it

I love a good sushi roll, but I'll admit it-I'm way too lazy to make them at home. This sushi bake is the perfect solution because it's simple and only takes a few minutes to prep. 

You also might like these sushi cups, which are SO easy to make as an appetizer idea.

So what is a sushi bake?

Sushi Bakes are an innovative way to enjoy sushi flavors without the hassle of rolling. Think of it like a sushi casserole! It's a layered dish, starting with a base of fluffy sushi rice, topped with a cream cheese salmon mixture, then baked to perfection. Then you'll cut it into small squares. We love serving these squares over seaweed sheets, almost like a taco!

Cut out of Sushi bake with avocado, sesame, and green onion toppings
Holding up freshly baked sushi casserole in a seaweed sheet

Is sushi healthy?

As a dietitian, I can say sushi is definitely a nourishing option. It provides a balance of carbohydrates, protein, and fat. Here's how:

  • Carbohydrates: Here we're using sushi rice. Rice provides nutrients like B vitamins and manganese, essential for energy production and overall health. 
  • Protein: Salmon is packed with healthy fats like omega-3 fatty acids, which are vital for brain health and reducing inflammation in the body.
  • Fat: In this recipe (and most sushi rolls) you'll find the fat in some form like avocado, mayo, or cream cheese. We're using all three and choosing lower fat mayo and cream cheese options for less saturated fat.  Avocado, in particular, is a great source of monounsaturated fats, known for their heart-healthy properties.
Sushi bake ingredients on a white background

What ingredients do you need?

  • Sushi Rice: The base of your sushi bake, sushi rice is sticky and holds the dish together. Look for it in the rice or international section of your grocery store.
  • Salmon: You can use fresh, frozen or even canned salmon for this recipe. If you don't like salmon, feel free to swap for cooked crab or shrimp.
  • Cream Cheese: Opt for a low-fat version to keep it lighter if you'd like.
  • Green Onions: They bring a fresh, zesty flavor. Find them in the produce section.
  • Avocado: A great source of healthy fats, it adds creaminess and richness. Pick ripe, slightly squishy avocados for the best flavor.
  • Mayonnaise: You can use a light mayo to cut down on calories without losing the creamy taste.
  • Sriracha Sauce: For that spicy kick! Adjust according to your heat preference.

How do you make this sushi casserole?

Prepare the sushi rice

Cook your sushi rice and season it with vinegar, sugar, and salt.

Sushi rice ingredients
Fluffy cooked sushi rice

Mix the salmon

Combine your flaked salmon with cream cheese, green onions, and your chosen sauce.

Cream cheese and salmon in a bowl
Salmon mixed together in white bowl

Assemble and bake

Layer your rice and salmon mixture in a baking dish and bake until golden.

Assembling sushi bake, starting with the rice
Assembling sushi bake, adding the salmon
Baked sushi with golden brown salmon

Prepare the spicy mayo

While the salmon sushi is baking, prepare the spicy mayo by mixing together light mayo, Sriracha, sauce of your choice, honey, and sesame oil.

Spicy mayo mixed in white bowl

Garnish with veggies and mayo

Top with avocado, more green onions, and a drizzle of spicy mayo.

Spicy mayo drizzled over baked sushi
Sheet pan sushi bake sprinkled with sesame and chopped greens.

Serve with seaweed

Cut into squares and enjoy with seaweed snack sheets. Alternatively, you can use full nori sheet and cut them into smaller pieces.

Sushi bake slice on plate with avocado and soy sauce.

What salmon should I use?

This recipe is a great way to use up leftover salmon. If you don't have any leftover salmon, you can also cook some from frozen salmon filets, fresh salmon filets, or even use 1 - 14 ounce can of canned salmon which is pre-cooked.

Recipe tips and tricks

  • Serving Tips: Try pairing your sushi bake with a light cucumber salad, steamed edamame, or miso soup.
  • Troubleshooting Tips: If your rice is too sticky, wet your spatula with water when spreading.
  • Scaling Tips: You can easily double the recipe by using a larger baking dish and doubling the ingredients.
Sushi bake portion with seaweed for serving

Customize it your way

Like all of my other recipes, this salmon sushi bake is completely customizable. You get to choose what kind of sauce and sugar you want to use.

  • Sauce of your choice: Use soy sauce, tamari, or coconut aminos depending on what you already enjoy or your dietary preferences. Tamari and coconut aminos are both gluten-free. We also love drizzling teriyaki coconut aminos over the final sushi bake!
  • Sugar of your choice: Feel free to use regular white sugar, a sugar-free alternative, or honey. This is used to subtly enhance the sushi rice's flavor, balancing the tanginess of the vinegar.

Feel free to also customize the veggies on top by using options like thinly sliced radishes, shredded carrots, or diced bell peppers for crunch and color.

Dipping sliced into soy sauce

Can you make it ahead of time?

Absolutely! Assemble your pan of sushi a day in advance and refrigerate. Then, bake it fresh when you're ready to serve.

How do I store leftovers?

Store leftovers in an airtight container for up to 3 days in the fridge. We often like to enjoy it cold over more seaweed sheets. You can also reheat in the microwave if you prefer it warm.

Square cut out of sushi served on a plate

Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

Sushi Bake 12
Print Recipe
5 from 4 votes

Sushi Bake

This Sushi Bake is the perfect way to enjoy the flavors of sushi without the hassle of rolling. Think of it like a sushi casserole! We love serving this bake over seaweed sheets, almost like a taco!
Prep Time15 minutes mins
Cook Time45 minutes mins
Course: Main Dish Choices
Cuisine: Asian
Servings: 8 servings
Calories: 270kcal
Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

Equipment

  • 8"x8" pan baking dish
  • 7"x11" (2 quart) pan baking dish
  • Ceramic sauce dipping bowls

Ingredients

Sushi Rice Ingredients:

  • 1 cup sushi rice, rinsed (makes about 3 cups cooked)
  • 1 ¼ cups water
  • 1 tablespoon rice vinegar
  • 1 tablespoon sweetener of your choice (white sugar, sugar-free alternative, or honey)
  • ¼ teaspoon salt

Salmon Topping:

  • 1 pound skinless salmon, cooked and flaked into pieces (about 2 heaping cups)*
  • ½ cup sliced green onions, divided
  • ¼ cup 2 ounces low-fat cream cheese
  • 2 teaspoons sauce of your choice (soy sauce, tamari, or coconut aminos)
  • 1 teaspoon sesame oil
  • ½ teaspoon garlic powder

Spicy Mayo Ingredients:

  • ¼ cup light mayonnaise
  • 1 teaspoon Sriracha
  • 1 teaspoon sauce of your choice (soy sauce, tamari, or coconut aminos)
  • 1 teaspoon honey
  • ½ teaspoon sesame oil

For Serving:

  • ½ cup avocado, diced into ¼-inch pieces
  • ½ cup cucumber, diced into ¼-inch pieces
  • 1 teaspoon black sesame seeds
  • 1 - 0.35 ounce package roasted seaweed snack sheets
  • Sauce of your choice, for dipping (soy sauce, tamari, or coconut aminos. We especially love dipping in teriyaki coconut aminos!)
instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

Instructions

  • Preheat your oven to 425°F (220°C). Prepare a 8x8 or 7"x11" (2 quart) pan baking dish with cooking spray.
  • Add rice and water to a medium pot over high heat. Bring to a boil, then reduce to low heat, cover with lid, and simmer until water is absorbed, about 15 minutes.
  • Remove from heat and let covered rice steam for an additional 10 minutes. Then, remove the lid and gently stir in rice vinegar, sugar, and salt.
  • In a separate bowl, combine cooked salmon, ¼ cup of the green onions, cream cheese, sauce of your choice, sesame oil, and garlic powder. Mix well until combined.
  • Spread the cooked sushi rice evenly over the prepared baking dish then layer over the salmon mixture.
  • Bake for 10 minutes, then broil for 1-2 minutes until slightly golden on top.
  • While the sushi pan is baking, in a small bowl whisk together all spicy mayo ingredients.
  • Remove sushi from the oven and drizzle spicy mayo on top. Then, garnish with ¼ cup remaining green onions, avocado, cucumber, and black sesame seeds.
  • Cut into squares and serve over seaweed. Dip into soy sauce if desired.

Video

Notes

Salmon Note: This recipe is a great way to use up leftover salmon. If you don't have any leftover, you can also cook some from frozen filets, fresh salmon filets, or even use 1 - 14 ounce can of canned salmon which is pre-cooked.

Nutrition

Serving: 1serving | Calories: 270kcal | Carbohydrates: 28g | Protein: 15g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 310mg | Potassium: 430mg | Fiber: 2.5g | Sugar: 3g | Calcium: 35mg

save this baked sushi recipe on pinterest:

Close up of bake with diced cucumber on top

Want more? Try these other salmon recipes:

  • Nut Crusted Salmon
  • Air Fryer Bang Bang Salmon
  • Honey Soy Glazed Salmon

Accordion Sweet Potatoes

January 3, 2024 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

These Accordion Sweet Potatoes are seriously such a fun, creative addition to your holiday feast or weeknight dinner. Serve them as an appetizer or side dish that's sure to impress. Plus, you get to customize the potatoes with any spices of your choice and serve with a smoky aioli for dipping.

Pulling apart accordion-cut sweet potatoes on a plate with smoked paprika aioli.

Disclosure: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. Thanks so much for your support! See my disclosure policy for more details.

Table of Contents

  • Why you'll love it
  • Are sweet potatoes healthy?
  • What ingredients do you need?
  • How do you cut accordion potatoes?
    • 1. Prep potatoes
    • 2. Make horizontal cuts
    • 3. Make diagonal cuts
    • 4. Season and add to baking sheet
  • Watch the tutorial
  • Recipe tips and tricks
  • Customize it your way
  • Can you accordion potatoes with regular potatoes?
  • Can you make accordion potatoes ahead of time?
  • How do I store leftovers?
  • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
    • save this accordion potatoes recipe on pinterest:
  • Want more? Try these other sweet potato recipes:

Why you'll love it

This Accordion Sweet Potatoes recipe is a delightful addition to any holiday spread. The unique accordion-style slicing of the sweet potatoes creates such an impressive presentation too. I won't lie, they are a labor of love but SO worth it.

Accordion Sweet Potatoes 15

What are accordion sweet potatoes?

The term "accordion" refers to the distinctive way in which the sweet potatoes are sliced before cooking. Almost similar to hasselback potatoes.

After slicing them like an accordion, drizzle on oil, seasonings, and then pop them in the oven or air fryer. Once they're cooked they'll pull apart like an accordion. They're almost like a fun spin on traditional fries.

Are sweet potatoes healthy?

In addition to their delicious taste, sweet potatoes are rich in vitamins and fiber. Their vibrant orange color indicates high levels of beta-carotene, a nutrient converted to Vitamin A in the body. 

By baking or air frying these potatoes with minimal oil, you're able to enjoy their natural sweetness without excess calories. 

We're also serving them with an aioli using Greek yogurt for an extra protein punch.

Accordion Sweet Potatoes 14

What ingredients do you need?

  • Sweet Potatoes: Select medium-sized sweet potatoes that are firm and free from blemishes. Wash them thoroughly to remove any dirt or debris. Choosing sweet potatoes of similar size ensures even cooking. I often grab a bag of Bako Sweet Potatoes which are pre-washed and SO delish!
  • Cooking Spray: Opt for a cooking spray that is suitable for high-temperature baking. This helps prevent the sweet potatoes from sticking to the baking sheet and promotes even browning. Olive oil or avocado oil sprays are good choices.
  • Spices of your choice: Pick high-quality spices based on your flavor preferences. Buying spices in the bulk section of the grocery store can be cost-effective, allowing you to purchase small amounts of each spice needed for the recipe. Then, you can simply refill your own jars too.
Bako Sweet accordion potatoes

How do you cut accordion potatoes?

The cutting technique for the accordion potatoes is the most important part. Let's break it down. Need more of a visual? Watch this video demoing the cutting in real time.

1. Prep potatoes

Begin by peeling the skin off the sweet potatoes. It's essential to start with a smooth surface for even slicing. Once peeled, use a sharp knife to cut the potatoes lengthwise into ½-inch thick slices. Typically, one sweet potato yields about three slices, so from four sweet potatoes, you should expect around 12 slices in total.

Sweet potatoes on white marble
Chop sticks next to sweet potato toast slice

2. Make horizontal cuts

Place a set of chopsticks on each side of one potato slice on your cutting board. These will act as guards, preventing the knife from slicing entirely through the potato. Carefully make small, close horizontal cuts across the length of the potato slice. The chopsticks will ensure you don't cut all the way through, keeping the bottom intact.

Sweet potato toast slice between chopsticks

3. Make diagonal cuts

After completing the horizontal cuts, it's time to flip the potato slices over. Now, you'll repeat the cutting process, but this time with diagonal cuts. Again, position the chopsticks to avoid cutting through, and make close, diagonal cuts down the length of each potato slice. This dual slicing method is what creates the unique 'accordion' effect in the potatoes.

Accordion sweet potatoes, cutting diagonally

4. Season and add to baking sheet

Once you've completed cutting all the potato slices, you should have a set of beautifully prepared accordion potatoes. These should now have a series of intricate cuts that will fan out slightly, perfect for seasoning and cooking. This method ensures not only an appealing look but also allows for even cooking and crispness in every bite.

Accordion sweet potatoes on baking sheet with spices of your choice

Watch the tutorial

Need more of a visual of how to assemble these potatoes? Watch my tutorial video below.

Recipe tips and tricks

  • Serving Tips: Pair accordion sweet potatoes with a light salad for freshness, or roasted vegetables for a well-rounded meal. The sweetness of the potatoes also complements savory protein dishes like grilled chicken or roasted turkey.
  • Troubleshooting Tips: Ensure the sweet potatoes are well-coated with cooking spray to prevent sticking. You can use parchment paper on the baking sheet for easier clean up too.
  • Scaling Tips: Feel free to double the recipe and use 8 sweet potatoes if you have them. You may want a chopping helper though!

Customize it your way

Like all of my other recipes, these Accordion Sweet Potatoes are completely customizable. You get to choose what spices you want to use.

  • Spices of your choice - Feel free to experiment with a variety of spices, such as cinnamon and nutmeg for a sweet touch or smoked paprika and cumin for some heat, and even savory ones like rosemary or garlic powder.
Golden brown sweet potato slices, served with light mayo aioli.

Can you accordion potatoes with regular potatoes?

Absolutely! Other potatoes varieties like Russets or Yukon Golds work well here. Follow the same methods for chopping. The cook time should generally be the same too-just keep an eye on them at the 30 minute mark to make sure they don't burn.

Can you make accordion potatoes ahead of time?

These Accordion Sweet Potatoes are best enjoyed fresh to preserve their crispy texture. You can prepare them ahead of time by cutting them into slices and small cuts. Then bake or air fry right before serving.

How do I store leftovers?

If you happen to have leftovers, store them in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 days. Reheat them in the oven or air fryer to revive their crunch.

Cooked accordion potatoes on a dish with dipping sauce

Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

Accordion Sweet Potatoes 13
Print Recipe
5 from 2 votes

Accordion Sweet Potatoes

These Accordion Sweet Potatoes are seriously such a fun, creative addition to your holiday feast or weeknight dinner. Serve them as an appetizer or side dish that's sure to impress!
Prep Time20 minutes mins
Cook Time40 minutes mins
Servings: 4 servings
Calories: 190kcal
Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

Equipment

  • Sharp knife
  • Chopsticks

Ingredients

Sweet Potatoes:

  • 4 medium sweet potatoes, washed
  • Cooking spray
  • 1 tablespoon spices of your choice (cinnamon, nutmeg, smoked paprika, cumin, rosemary, thyme, garlic powder, etc.)

Smoked Paprika Maple Aioli:

  • ¼ cup plain Greek yogurt
  • ¼ cup light mayonnaise
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice, about 1 lemon juiced
  • 1 tablespoon maple syrup
  • 1 teaspoon garlic, minced
  • ½ teaspoon smoked paprika
instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

Instructions

  • Peel the sweet potatoes skin then use a sharp knife to cut potatoes into ½-inch slices lengthwise. Since 1 sweet potato gives you about 3 slices, you should get around 12 slices total.
  • Place chopsticks next to the potato slice to prevent cutting all the way through. Make small, close horizontal cuts down across the length of all the potato slices.
  • Then, flip the potato slices and repeat-this time with diagonal cuts downwards.
  • Place slices on either an oven baking sheet or air fryer basket. Then, spray each side of the slices with cooking spray and evenly sprinkle over seasonings.
  • Oven instructions: Place sheet pan in oven and bake at 425ºF for 40 minutes, gently flipping them with a spatula halfway through. Let them cool outside of the oven on the pan for 5 minutes before touching to avoid breakage.
  • Air fryer instructions: Alternatively, you can air fry at 400ºF for 15-17 minutes until crispy and golden. Let cool in the air fryer basket for 5 minutes before serving.
  • While the potatoes are cooking, prepare the aioli by mixing all ingredients together in a small bowl. Serve with accordion potatoes for dipping.

Video

https://www.instagram.com/p/Cztw7UmLzkL/

Nutrition

Serving: 1serving | Calories: 190kcal | Carbohydrates: 35g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Potassium: 550mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 10g | Calcium: 80mg | Iron: 1.3mg

save this accordion potatoes recipe on pinterest:

Learn how to make accordion sweet potatoes for the holidays or as an appetizer!

Want more? Try these other sweet potato recipes:

  • Sweet Potato Power Bowl
  • Sweet Potato Kale Salad
  • Southwest Quinoa Salad

Breakfast Charcuterie Board

December 14, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 5 Comments

Say hello to the brunch spread of your dreams! This breakfast charcuterie board allows you to mix and match pancakes, sausage, eggs, fruit, and toppings of your choice. You can even make a holiday-inspired breakfast board.

Holiday breakfast charcuterie board ideas

Disclosure: This post may contain affiliate links. All opinions are my own; I never feature a brand that I don't love! See my disclosure policy for more details.

Table of Contents

  • What is a breakfast charcuterie board?
  • What goes on a breakfast charcuterie board?
    • 1. Pancakes
    • 2. Sausage
    • 3. Eggs
    • 4. Fruit & Jams
    • 5. Toppings & Extras
    • What should I put my breakfast charcuterie on?
  • Make your own holiday charcuterie board
    • Want more breakfast spread inspiration? Try these recipes:

This post was first published on May 4, 2022. It was updated on December 14, 2023 to include new photos and helpful tips.

What is a breakfast charcuterie board?

Charcuterie boards, also known as snack boards, are all the rage nowadays. That's because they're so easy to make while also being instagram-worthy! They're essentially boards filled with a variety of different ingredients like meats, cheese, and dippers. A breakfast charcuterie board follows the same concept by combining a variety of breakfast faves like pancakes, sausage, eggs, and fruit. 

Healthy breakfast spread

What goes on a breakfast charcuterie board?

Like all of my recipes, this beautiful brunch charcuterie board is completely customizable-mix and match from any of the following elements.

1. Pancakes

Pancakes are the star of the show for this board. Feel free to make your own homemade cakes or use a mix. I personally love whipping together these gluten-free oat flour pancakes! If you're more of a waffle fan, you can sub those too.

2. Sausage

Breakfast sausage is a great way to add in some protein and round out the board with a savory food. As a healthier choice, opt for grass-fed sausages, like these ones from Teton Waters Ranch. I love this brand because they are 100% grass-fed and finished, certified humane, and only contain a handful of ingredients.

If you don't eat meat, feel free to swap for a plant based breakfast patty.

Breakfast charcuterie board ideas

3. Eggs

Eggs are a breakfast staple. Feel free to cook your preferred method and then add to your board. It's typically easiest to scramble or hard boil them. However, you could also try for sunny side up and serve it in a tiny skillet over your board. 

If you're vegan, try scrambling up these vegan eggs from JUST Egg.

4. Fruit & Jams

When it comes to fruit, add over any of your favorites! Popular options include berries, bananas, and orange slices but anything goes here. During the holidays, it's super fun to serve this board alongside a watermelon christmas tree made with a foam cone too!

I also recommend having some jams to lather over the pancakes. For a healthier jam, try making your own homemade chia seed jam.

5. Toppings & Extras

Don't leave those pancakes plain. Be sure to have plenty of topping choices on your board. Here are some great options you could include:

  • Nut or seed butters 
  • Yogurt
  • Chocolate chips
  • Maple syrup
  • Butter
  • Toasted coconut flakes
  • Sliced almonds
  • Whip cream
  • Homemade granola

What should I put my breakfast charcuterie on?

It's usually best to break out your largest wooden board to build your breakfast platter on. If you don't have a wood board, you could also use a serving tray, cutting board, or lay parchment paper down on a kitchen island and build it on top.

Start by adding pancakes to the center then layer all other ingredients around it. Have fun with it and feel free to look up images for inspiration!

Grabbing a pancake from brunch charcuterie board

Make your own holiday charcuterie board

The holidays are an ideal time to share a breakfast platter with friends and family. Serve before the day's festivities or as a weekend brunch board.

You can elevate your board from everyday to extraordinary, by adding fun holiday props alongside your board. This healthy breakfast is filled with a balance of protein and carbohydrates to give you lasting energy throughout the day. Plus, you can easily customize this board it to fit various dietary preferences.

On this board, I've used Red's Egg'Wiches to fill both the "egg" and "sausage" option. Simply microwave from frozen then add to your platter.

Holiday breakfast charcuterie
Breakfast Charcuterie Board 2
Print Recipe
5 from 3 votes

Breakfast Charcuterie Board

Say hello to the brunch spread of your dreams! This breakfast charcuterie board allows you to mix and match with your favorites.
Prep Time20 minutes mins
Total Time20 minutes mins
Course: Breakfast Choices
Cuisine: American
Servings: 1 board
Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

Ingredients

  • Pancakes prepared from favorite recipe or a mix*
  • Grass-fed breakfast sausage
  • Cooked eggs of your choice (scrambled, hard boiled, or fried)
  • Fresh fruit of your choice (bananas, strawberries, raspberries, blackberries, blueberries, orange slices, etc.)
  • Fruit Jam
  • Nut or seed butter of your choice (peanut butter, almond butter, cashew butter, etc.)
  • Yogurt of your choice (flavored or plain)
  • Chocolate Chips
  • Maple Syrup
  • Butter
instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

Instructions

  • Mix and match any ingredients from the above list.
  • Arrange all ingredients on a wooden board or serving platter. 
  • Store any leftovers in an airtight container for up to 3 days.

Video

Notes

*Need a pancake recipe? Check out my easy oat flour pancakes!

Want more breakfast spread inspiration? Try these recipes:

  • Baked Oats
  • High Protein Banana Bread
  • Egg White Frittata
  • Blueberry Pancake Bake

save this breakfast platter on pinterest:

Build your own breakfast board

Air Fryer Egg Rolls

December 7, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

These Air Fryer Egg Rolls are ideal to make as an easy and delicious appetizer. They contain a delightful blend of carrots, cabbage and sauce that is air fried to golden perfection. There's also the option to add in shredded chicken or turkey-perfect for using up those holiday leftovers!

Air fried egg rolls with sweet chili dipping sauce

Disclosure: This post is sponsored by Libby's® Vegetables. All opinions are my own; I never feature a brand that I don't love!

Table of Contents

  • Why you'll love it
  • Egg rolls vs spring rolls
  • What are the main ingredients you'll need?
  • How do you make these air fryer egg rolls?
  • Recipe tips and tricks
  • Using leftover holiday turkey
  • Customize it your way
  • Can you make egg rolls ahead of time?
  • How do I store leftovers?
    • Check out these other healthy air fryer recipes too:
  • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
    • save this air fryer egg roll recipe on pinterest:

Why you'll love it

Imagine biting into a perfectly crispy egg roll, filled with a vibrant mix of cabbage and tender sliced carrots from Libby's Vegetables. These Air Fryer Egg Rolls are not just a treat for your taste buds, but they're also incredibly easy to make. Trust me, they're a crowd-pleasing appetizer or even a light meal.

Plus, by using the air fryer you achieve that crunchy texture without excess oil from deep frying. This makes them an overall more nourishing option.

Are canned carrots healthy?

Absolutely! Carrots are packed with essential vitamins and minerals. Here, I'm using Libby's Vegetables, which are made with US-grown carrots. They're prepared within hours from the farm where they were harvested, sealing in goodness, flavor and vibrant orange color.

Canned carrots are super versatile too. Try roasting with honey garlic butter, adding to a cozy chowder, or serving in these air fried egg rolls.

Wood platter presenting air fryer egg rolls and green onions next to Libby's carrots

Egg rolls vs spring rolls

Egg rolls and spring rolls are both beloved appetizers, each with unique characteristics. The names can sometimes be interchanged but in general, this recipe is more aligned with an egg roll.

  • Origin: Egg rolls are a product of Chinese-American cuisine, tailored to American palates and popularized in Chinese-American communities. Spring rolls have roots across Asia and have different variations across Chinese, Vietnamese, Thai, and Filipino cuisines.
  • Wrappers: Egg rolls are often wrapped in a thicker dough made from wheat. Spring rolls are more commonly wrapped in a translucent wrap made from rice flour, although some spring rolls may call for egg roll wraps.
  • Fillings: Egg rolls are commonly filled with cooked ingredients like proteins, cabbage, and carrots. Summer spring rolls are usually served cold and wrapped in fresh vegetables like lettuce, bean sprouts, and herbs.
All ingredients for egg rolls layed out on blue backdrop
Green onion tops vs green onion whites

What are the main ingredients you'll need?

  • Libby's Sliced Carrots: These vibrant carrots add a natural sweetness with very little prep work-that's a win in my books. Look for them in the canned vegetables aisle.
  • Cabbage: Sometimes you can find pre-shredded cabbage in a bag, otherwise, you can buy a whole head of cabbage and quickly slice it at home.
  • Green Onions: These provide a mild onion flavor and a pop of color. For this recipe, we're splitting it up into the green tops and the white bottoms. The white part will be sauteed whereas the green parts will be used for garnish.
  • Egg Roll Wrappers: Typically available in the refrigerated section, these thin sheets of dough are the perfect vehicle for your delicious filling. Sometimes they are called spring roll wrappers as well.
Egg rolls in air fryer basket
Crispy egg rolls cooked in air fryer basket

How do you make these air fryer egg rolls?

  • Prepare the Filling: Sauté cabbage, green onions, and carrots with optional protein in a skillet.
  • Wrap It Up: Spoon the filling onto egg roll wrappers, fold, and roll tightly. Seal the edges with a dab of water. If you are new to rolling egg rolls, start with a smaller amount of filling (⅓ cup) as this will be easier to wrap. Once you feel confident, you can fill it with a larger amount (½ cup).
  • Air Fry: Preheat your air fryer, spray the rolls with oil, then air fry until golden brown and crispy. Remember, don't overcrowd your air fryer basket for the crispiest results!
  • Egg Roll Process Shots 2
  • Egg Roll Process Shots 3
  • Egg Roll Process Shots 4
  • Egg Roll Process Shots 5
  • Egg Roll Process Shots 6
  • Egg Roll Process Shots 7
  • Egg Roll Process Shots
  • Egg Roll Process Shots 1

Recipe tips and tricks

  • Serving Tips: Pair these spring rolls with a refreshing cucumber salad or a bowl of hot and sour soup.
  • Troubleshooting Tips: If your rolls aren't as crispy as you'd like, ensure you haven't overfilled them. You may have to air fry for an extra 1-2 minutes as everyone's air fryers are different.
  • Scaling Tips: Want to make a big batch? Double or triple the ingredients. Just keep in mind: you'll have to work in batches as the air fryer basket can likely only hold about 6-8 egg rolls at a time.
Air Fryer Egg Rolls 2

Using leftover holiday turkey

Got leftover turkey from the holiday feast? Don't let it go to waste! This recipe offers a unique and delicious way to repurpose your leftover turkey. Instead of the usual sandwich or soup, add shredded turkey or chicken inside these crispy rolls. It's a creative and flavorful way to make the most out of your holiday leftovers!

Customize it your way

Like all of my other recipes, this egg roll recipe is completely customizable. You get to choose what sauce you want to use.

  • Sauce of your choice: To give the vegetables some extra flavor, we're stirring in a tablespoon of either soy sauce, tamari, or coconut aminos. Use your favorite depending on what you already have on hand and suit your dietary preferences. Tamari is gluten-free and coconut aminos are both gluten-free and soy-free.
Air fryer egg rolls served on wood platter with sauce

Can you make egg rolls ahead of time?

Absolutely! You can prepare the rolls and seal them without frying. Store them in the refrigerator for a day or two, ready to be air-fried whenever you're craving a crispy bite.

You can even freeze them before frying by wrapping them individually with wax paper and saran wrap. To air fry egg rolls from frozen, preheat your air fryer to 350ºF like normal. Then simply air fry for a bit longer-about 15 minutes.

Hand dipping air fryer egg roll in sauce

How do I store leftovers?

Store any extras in an airtight container for up to 3 days in the fridge. To preserve their crispiness, reheat them in the air fryer at 350°F for about 4 minutes.

Check out these other healthy air fryer recipes too:

  • Air Fryer Crispy Chickpeas
  • Air Fryer Edamame
  • Air Fryer Salmon Bites with Bang Bang Sauce
  • Mexican Street Corn Style Air Fryer Potatoes

Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

Air Fryer Egg Rolls 12
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Air Fryer Egg Rolls

These Air Fryer Egg Rolls are ideal to make as an easy anddelicious appetizer. They contain a delightful blend of carrots, cabbage andsauce that is air fried to golden perfection. There's also the option to add inshredded chicken or turkey-perfect for using up those holiday leftovers!
Prep Time10 minutes mins
Cook Time20 minutes mins
Course: Appetizer & Side Dish Choices
Cuisine: Asian
Keyword: air fryer
Servings: 6 to 8 large egg rolls
Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

Ingredients

  • 1 tablespoon avocado oil or olive oil
  • 1 - 14.5 ounces can Libby's Sliced Carrots, drained and sliced into strips
  • 2 cups shredded green cabbage
  • 4 green onions, thinly sliced and separating out the green tops from the white bulbs*
  • 1 tablespoon sauce of your choice (soy sauce, tamari, or coconut aminos)
  • 1 teaspoon Sriracha
  • Optional: 1 cup shredded cooked chicken or leftover cooked turkey
  • 1 package of 6-inch wide egg roll wrappers (We won't use all of them but they typically come in a standard pack)
  • Cooking spray
  • ¼ cup cup sweet chili sauce
instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

Instructions

  • Heat oil in a large skillet over medium heat.
  • Add shredded cabbage and green onion white bottoms and saute for 3 minutes.
  • Stir in carrots and optional chicken or turkey and saute for 2 more minutes.
  • Finally, stir in sauce of your choice and Sriracha then remove from heat.
  • Place the wrapper like a diamond towards you. Spoon about ⅓ to ½ cup of the filling onto the bottom corner of the wrapper.
  • Fold the bottom corner over the filling, then fold in the sides, and roll it up tightly. Use a little water to seal the top corner of the wrapper. Repeat with the remaining mixture to make 6-8 rolls in total.
  • Preheat your air fryer to 350°F. Lightly spray both sides of the egg rolls with cooking spray then arrange them in a single layer in the air fryer basket. Make sure they are not touching or overlapping.
  • Air fry for 10-12 minutes, turning halfway through, until golden brown and crispy.
  • Let cool in the air fryer basket for 2 minutes before removing and placing onto a serving plate. Garnish with green onion tops and serve with sweet chili sauce for dipping.

Video

https://www.instagram.com/p/C0kDpz8Rz5B/

Notes

Green Onion Note: Use the whole green onion and separate the green tops from the white bulbs. You should end up with about ¼ cup green tops and ¼ cup white bottoms. We sauté the white slices and save the green slices for garnishing.
Serving Note: If you’re using no chicken or turkey, this will yield about 6 rolls. If you’re adding the chicken or turkey, it will make about 8 rolls.
You can also view this recipe on Libby’s Vegetables website here.

save this air fryer egg roll recipe on pinterest:

Save this homemade air fryer egg rolls with dipping sauce on Pinterest

Fruit Christmas Tree

December 4, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 4 Comments

This Fruit Christmas Tree is the perfect edible centerpiece for your holiday gatherings. Crafted with fresh watermelon and green grapes, it's a nutritious treat that is sure to impress all your guests. Plus, it's a fun activity to get kids or friends involved in making.

Watermelon Tree 8 1

Disclosure: This post has been sponsored by The Watermelon Board. All opinions are my own; I never feature a brand that I don't love! ]

Table of Contents

  • Why you'll love it
  • Can you find watermelon in the winter?
  • Is watermelon healthy?
  • Can watermelon make you happy?
  • What ingredients do you need?
  • How to make a fruit christmas tree
    • 1. Skewer the fruit
    • 2. Fill in with mint
    • 3. Add star topper
    • 4. Dust with powdered sugar
  • Recipe tips and tricks
  • Perfect for the holidays 
  • Customize it your way
  • Can you make this fruit tree ahead of time?
  • How do I store leftovers?
  • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
    • save this fruit christmas tree recipe on pinterest:
    • Want more? Try these other holiday snacks:

Why you'll love it

The Christmas tree made with fruit is not only visually stunning but it's also a fresh addition to your holiday table. Serve this watermelon tree at weekend brunch or next to a game night charcuterie board as a colorful and refreshing addition. Plus, it's a nutritious and hydrating alternative to traditional holiday sweets.

Watermelon Tree 11 1

Can you find watermelon in the winter?

You might associate watermelon with the sunny days of summer, but did you know that it's available year-round? Watermelon is grown in over 30 U.S. states several months out of the year. (Use this chart to see where watermelon comes from throughout the year). When domestic production of watermelon slows down in the colder months, it's imported from Central American countries within a few days of picking.

During the winter, you can find it in mini seedless form or "fresh cuts" which are pre-cut and ready to go.

For this recipe we are using a mini seedless watermelon, cutting it in half, and scooping into spheres. If you can't find mini watermelons, you can use the fresh cut cubes and place them on the toothpicks in the same manner.

So, whether it's a warm summer day or a chilly winter morning, you can savor the taste of watermelon and use it to create this Fruit Christmas Tree.

Watermelon Tree 2 1
Freeze Watermelon

Is watermelon healthy?

Watermelon offers a wealth of vitamins and minerals. In fact, just two cups of watermelon has 80 calories alongside vitamins A (8% DV), B1 (8% DV),  B6 (8% DV), and C (25% DV), and the minerals potassium (6% DV), magnesium (6% DV), and phosphorus (2% DV). With 80 calories per 2-cup serving, watermelon can be a smart option for those watching their weight.

With its high water content (92% water), watermelon is also an excellent choice for staying hydrated. 

Can watermelon make you happy?

According to a 2022 survey from the National Watermelon Promotion Board, 82% of watermelon purchasers say eating watermelon boosts their mood! They also found that 100% of respondents said watermelon makes them feel either very happy (70%) or somewhat happy (30%). 

This means during the holiday season, adding watermelon into the mix is the perfect way to boost the cheery spirit and make your celebrations even merrier.

Mackenzie Burgess holding up fruit tree recipe

What ingredients do you need?

Just gather 3 ingredients and a handful of craft supplies for this watermelon christmas tree.

  • Mini Seedless Watermelon: Look for a watermelon with vibrant green skin and one that feels heavy for its size-that means it's extra juicy. 
  • Green Grapes: Choose a bag of plump, crunchy green grapes. Their crisp texture and sweet flavor will provide a delightful contrast to the watermelon. Ensure they are thoroughly washed and dried before use.
  • Powdered Sugar: While this is an optional ingredient, it enhances the tree's holiday appeal with a touch of edible "snow".
  • Foam Cone: This foam cone serves as the structural base for your Fruit Christmas Tree. You can typically find foam cones at craft stores or dollar stores.
  • Cling Wrap: Cling wrap is typically recommended to cover the foam cone with so the food isn't directly in contact with it.
  • Toothpicks: You'll need toothpicks to skewer the watermelon balls and grapes, helping you assemble the tree's colorful "ornaments" securely. Make sure to have enough toothpicks on hand to complete the entire tree.
  • Star Stencil: This stencil or cookie cutter will help you achieve a crisp star shape. Simply lay it on your piece of rind, trace with a marker, and cut this out with a knife. You could also use a different topper such as cheese or a piece of foam.
Watermelon Tree 14 1

How to make a fruit christmas tree

Gathering friends, family, and kiddos to create this Fruit Christmas Tree together not only adds to the enjoyment but also helps it come together quickly. Here's how to make it:

1. Skewer the fruit

Start with layering on the watermelon and then add over the green grapes. We like to add them in sporadic places until the whole cone is filled.

Watermelon Tree 3 1

2. Fill in with mint

Fresh mint makes the tree smell super fresh and also gives it more of a tree look.

Watermelon Tree 4 1

3. Add star topper

The watermelon rind makes a super fun and unique topper. Carefully at this to a toothpick on the top grape.

Watermelon Tree 17 1

4. Dust with powdered sugar

Use a fine mesh strainer to lightly sift and dust the entire tree with powdered sugar. This gives it a snowy finish. Keep in mind, this powdered sugar may get a little messy and fall onto the areas around the tree.

Watermelon Tree 5 1

Recipe tips and tricks

  • Serving Tips: Display your Fruit Christmas Tree on a decorative plate or platter to elevate its presentation. Encourage guests to pluck their favorite fruits directly from the tree.
  • Troubleshooting Tips: When skewering the watermelon balls and grapes, make sure to use toothpicks that are sturdy enough to hold the fruit securely. Also, the sharper the toothpick, the easier it will be to press it into the tough foam cone.
  • Scaling Tips: You can adjust the size of your Fruit Christmas Tree by choosing a larger or smaller foam cone and using more or fewer watermelon balls and grapes.

Perfect for the holidays 

The Fruit Christmas Tree is truly a showstopper at holiday gatherings. Its vibrant colors and creative design make it a fantastic addition to Christmas, New Year's, or any festive occasion. It's a centerpiece that's sure to spread joy to all who partake.

Watermelon Tree 9 1

Customize it your way

Like all of my other recipes, this holiday tree is completely customizable. You get to choose what "snow dusting" you want to use.

  • Snow dusting ingredient of your choice: We prefer using powdered sugar for the most genuine snow effect. However, if you don't have powdered sugar or want to limit added sugar, you could also use white edible glitter, a stevia-based confectioners sweetener, or shredded coconut.

Can you make this fruit tree ahead of time?

While you can wrap the cone, wash the fruit, and get all supplies gathered-we'd recommend waiting until the day of to assemble your tree with the fruit. This allows it to taste and look its best.

Watermelon Tree 13 1

How do I store leftovers?

If you do end up with some extra fruit that hasn't been gobbled off the tree, you can remove it from the toothpick and store it in an airtight container for snacking on over the next few days.

Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

Watermelon Tree 10 1
Print Recipe
5 from 3 votes

Fruit Christmas Tree

This Fruit Christmas Tree is the perfect edible centerpiece for your holiday gatherings. Crafted with fresh watermelon and green grapes, it's a nutritious treat that is sure to impress all your guests. Plus, it's a fun activity to get kids or friends involved in making.
Prep Time20 minutes mins
Course: Snack Choices
Keyword: holiday
Servings: 1 Fruit Christmas Tree
Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

Equipment

  • Star-shaped stencil, print out, or cookie cutter
  • Foam cone (3.7in x 8.9in)*
  • Cling wrap
  • Toothpicks

Ingredients

  • 1 mini seedless watermelon
  • 1 -1.5 pound bag of green grapes
  • 1 - 0.5 ounce package fresh mint leaves
  • Snow dusting ingredient of your choice (We prefer using powdered sugar but if you're wanted to cut back on the added sugar, you could also use white edible glitter, a stevia-based confectioners sweetener, or shredded coconut)
instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

Instructions

  • Prepare watermelon balls by cutting the watermelon in half and using a melon baller to create balls from both sides of the watermelon. Then, cut off a thin piece of rind and use a star stencil as a guide to trace with a marker and cut the rind into the star "topper".
  • Cover foam cone in cling wrap and add to plate or preferred serving base. We recommend doing this now as it's more difficult to transport once it's fully built.
  • Push toothpicks halfway into the foam then add over watermelon balls. Continue in random places until about halfway filled, leaving space for the grapes.
  • For the remaining open areas, push toothpicks halfway into the foam then add over green grapes. Add 3-5 green grapes to the top of the cone to create the full tree shape.
  • For any remaining gaps, fill in with fresh mint leaves (no toothpicks needed here).
  • Insert a toothpick into the top most grape and skewer the watermelon rind star on top.
  • Right before serving, use a fine mesh strainer to lightly sift and dust the entire tree with powdered sugar or snow dusting ingredient of your choice. This gives it a festive snowy finish.

Video

https://www.instagram.com/p/C0cf3zCvsUJ/

Notes

*Foam Cone Note: You can find foam cones available at craft stores or your local dollar store. For this recipe, I am using a 3.7" x 8.9" medium sized cone. If you are serving a large crowd, you could also use a 3.8" x 11.9" cone and buy a bit more fruit to fill it up. The foam cones also come in different colors. We grabbed a green one but you could also use white.

save this fruit christmas tree recipe on pinterest:

Pinterest Mackenzie will do 1

Want more? Try these other holiday snacks:

  • Gingerbread Mug Cake
  • Watermelon Walnut Currant Chutney
  • Date Snickers
  • Snack Board
  • Chocolate Popcorn

Bejeweled Rice

November 29, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 2 Comments

This Bejeweled Rice recipe is perfect for turning any meal into a special celebration. It contains crave-worthy saffron-infused rice, studded with a colorful array of "jewels" like blueberries, glazed carrots, and toasted nuts. Try making this colorful jeweled rice during the holidays and serve alongside your favorite protein.

Decorative Bejeweled Rice, colorful toppings, blue background on white platter

Table of Contents

  • What is bejeweled rice?
  • What ingredients do you need?
  • How do you make jeweled rice?
    • 1. Make the rice
    • 2. Add green onions and blueberries
    • 3. Add glazed carrots and toasted nuts
    • 4. Add golden raisins and drizzle in oil
  • Perfect for the holidays
  • This is recipe vegan?
  • Recipe tips and tricks
  • Customize it your way
  • Can you make it ahead of time?
  • How do I store leftovers?
  • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
    • save this jeweled rice recipe on pinterest:
    • Want more? Try these other holiday dishes:

Disclosure: This post has been sponsored by the U.S. Highbush Blueberry Council. All opinions are my own; I never feature a brand that I don't love!

What is bejeweled rice?

Bejeweled Rice, also known as Persian Jeweled Rice, is a sensory delight. It combines a bed of fluffy basmati rice topped with sweet blueberries, buttery carrots, and crunchy nuts. 

It's also SO simple to make and will leave your guests super impressed. We make it every year for Christmas and it's always a hit! 

Plus, if you're an avid "Swiftie" like us, you'll love how this rice is inspired by the song "Bejeweled".

Artfully arranged Bejeweled Rice with vibrant toppings and carrots and green onions on the side

Is this rice dish healthy?

Along with this dish being a beautiful display, it's also a nutritious choice. The combination of ingredients offers a balance of carbohydrates, healthy fats, and essential nutrients. We also consider this dish an easy and colorful way to rest your gut during the holiday season. In fact, did you know blueberries can really be a star ingredient for our gut?

Gut health benefits of blueberries

Recent research shows a positive link between blueberries and gut health. A new study published in Nutrients looked at the effect of blueberry consumption on symptoms and overall quality of life in 43 adults ages 18-60 with a BMI of 18.5 - 32.9 kg/m2 having irritable bowel syndrome or functional dyspepsia or both over a six week period.

The researchers found that daily consumption of blueberries relieved abdominal symptoms and improved general markers of well-being in people with gastrointestinal disorders. They found these effects observed when consuming an equivalent of 1 ¼ cup of blueberries daily. 

Researchers suggest that the symptom relief may be due to the polyphenols in blueberries, which may have potential antioxidant, anti-inflammatory, antibacterial and neuroprotective properties. 

Green onions, blueberries, carrots, raisins, almonds laid out on blue backdrop

What ingredients do you need?

  • Basmati Rice: Known for its long grains and fragrant aroma, you can easily find it in the rice section of your local grocery store.
  • Saffron Threads: These precious strands add a luxurious golden hue to the rice. You can find saffron in the spice aisle or at your local global market. It can be quite pricey so you might consider purchasing a small amount.
  • Nuts: Choose your favorites to add a delightful crunch.
  • Butter:  Used to add a rich flavor to the carrots. If you're vegan, feel free to substitute for olive oil
  • Carrots: Sliced into thin ¼-inch rounds for an elegant appearance.
  • Green Onions: Providing a pop of bright green as one of the jewels.
  • Fresh Blueberries: Bursting with naturally sweet flavor and vibrant color. Blueberries are also a good source of fiber with 4 grams fiber per serving.
  • Golden Raisins: Adding a sweet and chewy contrast to the ensemble.
  • Extra Virgin Olive Oil: Optional, but finishes the "jewels" with a beautiful shine.

How do you make jeweled rice?

This recipe may take a bit more detail and time to assemble but trust us- it's worth every effort! Here's how to make it:

1. Make the rice

Toasting the rice adds extra complexity to each grain. Then add over boiling water to speed up the heating process, let simmer, and stir in your saffron.

Before transferring to a platter, make sure you have all your "jewels" prepped and ready to add.

Saffron rice
Saffron rice on platter

2. Add green onions and blueberries

These are the first two ingredients to top our jeweled rice. With each ingredient, carefully place them in a diagonal line.

Adding blueberries
Adding rest of ingredients

3. Add glazed carrots and toasted nuts

Glazing the carrots allows them to become tender and makes them look more like jewels too. Toasting the sliced almonds makes these extra nutty and delicious. 

4. Add golden raisins and drizzle in oil

Finally, add your golden raisins as the last jewel for our colorful rice. Optionally, drizzle everything with a little extra virgin olive oil for added shine!

If you're not out to impress anyone, you're also welcome to just toss everything together instead of layering it. 

Colorful Bejeweled Rice on plate with gold utensils
Jeweled Rice all mixed together

Perfect for the holidays

This Jeweled Rice is seriously a showstopper on any holiday table. Its vibrant colors and luxurious flavors make it a perfect addition to Thanksgiving, Christmas, or any special celebration. It's the dish that will have everyone saying "Wow!" and craving seconds.

This is recipe vegan?

This recipe calls for butter but you can easily swap for olive oil or plant butter to make this recipe vegan-friendly.

Recipe tips and tricks

  • Serving Tips: Bejeweled Rice pairs wonderfully with roasted chicken, baked salmon, or our lamb meatballs. Feel free to add a dollop of yogurt or feta on top of the rice for extra creaminess. Other flavorful ingredients like pickled red onions or chopped cilantro pair well with this rice as well.
  • Troubleshooting Tips: To avoid sticky rice, rinse it thoroughly before cooking and fluff it gently with a fork after cooking to separate each grain. When toasting nuts, watch them closely to prevent burning.
  • Scaling Tips: This recipe makes enough for about 8 people, but you can always double it for larger gatherings. 

Customize it your way

Like all of my other recipes, Bejeweled Rice is completely customizable. You get to choose your favorite nuts to use.

  • Nuts of your choice - In the photograph, we're showing off toasted sliced almonds. You could also use pistachios, chopped cashews, walnuts, or any other nuts you have on hand.
Colorful ingredients next to saffron rice one pot

Can you make it ahead of time?

We recommend making this recipe fresh for the best results. That's because if you were to make it ahead of time and reheat it, the blueberries would burst and become messy. Plus, the rice tends to taste best fresh.

How do I store leftovers?

Store any leftovers in an airtight container for up to 3 days in the fridge. To reheat, simply microwave your preferred portion. Just keep in mind when reheating, the blueberries will become hot and burst open.

Colorful Bejeweled Rice on plate with gold utensils

Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

Bejeweled Rice 6
Print Recipe
5 from 2 votes

Bejeweled Rice

This Bejeweled Rice recipe is perfect to serve during the holidays alongside your favorite protein. It's studded with a colorful array of "jewels" like blueberries, glazed carrots, and toasted nuts.
Prep Time15 minutes mins
Cook Time45 minutes mins
Total Time1 hour hr
Course: Appetizer & Side Dish Choices
Cuisine: Persian
Keyword: holiday
Servings: 8 servings
Calories: 280kcal
Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

Equipment

  • Large Platter

Ingredients

Rice Ingredients:

  • 2 tablespoons butter (or olive oil if vegan)
  • 2 cups basmati rice, rinsed well and soaked for 30 minutes
  • 3 cups boiling water
  • 1 teaspoon salt
  • ½ teaspoon 1 large pinch saffron threads, soaked in 3 tablespoons of hot water for 30 minutes

"Jewel" Ingredients:

  • ½ cup chopped nuts of your choice (sliced almonds, pistachios, cashews, walnuts, etc.)
  • 1 tablespoon butter
  • 2 cups carrots, cut on a bias into ¼-inch slices (about 3 large carrots)
  • ½ cup green onions, thinly sliced (about 6 individual stalks)
  • 1 cup fresh blueberries
  • ¼ cup golden raisins
  • Optional but recommended: 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

Instructions

Rice Instructions:

  • In a medium pot or deep saute pan, melt butter over medium heat. Add soaked rice and toast for 1 minute. Add boiling water and salt. Bring to a boil, then cover with a tight fitting lid and reduce heat to low. Cook for 15 minutes, then remove from heat with lid still on and let steam for an additional 15 minutes.
  • When rice is done cooking, gently fluff with a fork. Then, spoon over saffron water in various parts of the rice, so it stains some part of the rice, but not all of it.

"Jewel" Instructions:

  • Toast nuts by adding them to a dry pan over medium heat. Toss frequently until golden and aromatic, about 3-5 minutes. Set aside.
  • To the same pan over medium heat, add carrots along with 1 tablespoon butter and ¼ cup water. Let simmer for 8-10 mins until tender and liquid has evaporated, stirring occasionally. Season with salt and pepper, to taste.

Assembly Instructions:

  • Transfer saffron rice to a large 16-inch platter then in neat rows layer over ingredients in the following order from top to bottom: green onions, blueberries, glazed carrots, toasted nuts, and golden raisins.
  • Optional but recommended: For a more decadent and moist rice texture, evenly drizzle extra virgin olive oil over the entire platter of rice. This gives the jewels a nice "shine" too!

Video

https://www.instagram.com/p/C0PyYTYrJ9k/

Notes

If you don't feel like layering, you can just mix all the toppings into the rice before arranging on the platter. It just may not look quite as pretty. 🙂

Nutrition

Calories: 280kcal | Carbohydrates: 47g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 320mg | Potassium: 280mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 7g | Calcium: 40mg

save this jeweled rice recipe on pinterest:

Save this Bejeweled Rice on Pinterest

Want more? Try these other holiday dishes:

  • Lamb Meatballs
  • Blueberry-Glazed Roasted Turkey
  • Deconstructed Chicken Pot Pie
  • Turkey Tenderloin Sheet Pan Meal

Honey Soy Glazed Salmon

November 27, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

This Honey Soy Glazed Salmon is simple, yet so delicious. Fresh grilled, pan seared, baked, or air fried salmon fillets are topped with a flavorful glaze that you'll want to eat on repeat. Perfect to make for the holidays too!

This Honey Soy Glazed Salmon is simple, yet so delicious. Fresh grilled or pan seared salmon fillets are topped with a flavorful glaze that you’ll want to eat on repeat. #SalmonRecipes #HoneySoy #Grilling #Umami

Table of Contents

  • Why you'll love this honey soy glazed salmon
  • What are the health benefits of salmon?
  • How do I cook salmon fillets?
    • Cooking salmon in a pan
    • Cooking salmon on the grill
    • Cooking salmon in the oven
    • Cooking salmon in the air fryer
  • How do I make the honey soy glaze?
  • Can you double the recipe?
  • What else should I serve with this honey soy glazed salmon?
  • Customize it your way
  • How do I store leftovers?
  • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
    • save this honey soy glazed salmon recipe on pinterest:
    • Check out these other healthy salmon recipes:

This post was first published on June 11, 2020. It was updated on November 27, 2023.

Why you'll love this honey soy glazed salmon

This salmon is the perfect combo of sweet and savory. We've made it hundreds of times and it's always a crowd pleaser. Plus, the ease of switching up cooking methods - be it grilling, pan-searing, baking, or air frying - means this salmon recipe will work for any kitchen setup.

What are the health benefits of salmon?

Salmon is an incredible source of healthy fats, specifically a type called omega-3 fatty acids. Omega-3 fats have been proven to be heart healthy as they can help reduce risk for heart disease and stroke. 

Salmon is also a great source of lean protein and vitamin D-which can be hard to find in food sources. Overall, we should aim to eat fish at least twice a week.

How do I cook salmon fillets?

For this recipe, you can cook the salmon fillets several different ways. Buying salmon fillets pre-cut makes for easy portions and plating. Alternatively, you can also buy one pound of salmon whole.

Cooking salmon in a pan

First, add olive oil to a large skillet over medium-high heat. Then, add your salmon fillets, skin side down. Cook for about 4-5 minutes, depending on the thickness of the fillet, then flip. Cook for another 4-5 minutes until salmon flakes easily with a fork.

Cooking salmon on the grill

Here's how to make honey soy grilled salmon.

First, make sure your salmon and grill is well oiled. Then, add your salmon fillets skinless side down on the grill-this ensures you get those delicious grill marks on top. Cook for about 4-5 minutes, depending on the thickness of the fillet, then carefully flip onto the skin side. Cook for another 4-5 minutes until salmon flakes easily with a fork. You can also simply wrap the salmon in foil and cook for 10-12 minutes until done. 

This Honey Soy Glazed Salmon is simple, yet so delicious. Fresh grilled or pan seared salmon fillets are topped with a flavorful glaze that you’ll want to eat on repeat. #SalmonRecipes #HoneySoy #Grilling #Umami
Honey soy glazed salmon

Cooking salmon in the oven

You can bake salmon too. Cook salmon fillets or whole salmon in the oven at 425 degrees. I usually bake salmon for about 8-12 minutes depending on the thickness on your fillet. You'll know it's done when the salmon flakes easily with a fork.

Cooking salmon in the air fryer

Air frying is perfect during the summertime when you don't want to heat up your oven. Cook salmon fillets or whole salmon in the air fryer at 400 degrees. I usually air fry salmon for about 7-10 minutes depending on the thickness on your fillet. You'll know it's done when the salmon flakes easily with a fork.

How do I make the honey soy glaze?

The honey soy glaze comes together in no time. Simply add all glaze ingredients to a small saucepan and stir over medium heat for 5-7 minutes until glaze is slightly thickened. Don't leave the glaze on the heat for too long or it will become overly thick. 

The key to this glaze is the fresh ginger and fresh garlic which add that savory, umami flavor. You want to make sure the ginger and garlic are very finely grated. They should be almost into a paste-like consistency so they mix easily with the other liquid ingredients. To save time, you can buy pre-made ginger and garlic paste in the produce section.

For extra flavor, we're also marinating the salmon in half of the sauce for 15 minutes.

This Honey Soy Glazed Salmon is simple, yet so delicious. Fresh grilled or pan seared salmon fillets are topped with a flavorful glaze that you’ll want to eat on repeat. #SalmonRecipes #HoneySoy #Grilling #Umami

Can you double the recipe?

If you're serving a crowd for a dinner party or holiday gathering, you can easily double the recipe.

What else should I serve with this honey soy glazed salmon?

Serve with jasmine rice and grilled or sautéed vegetables of your choice to create a balanced meal. Vegetables that pair well with this dish are bok choy, broccoli, asparagus, or summer squash. You can also try different protein options like chicken, tofu, or edamame. 

Customize it your way

Like all of my other recipes, this honey soy glazed salmon is completely customizable. You get to choose what sauce you want to use.

  • Sauce of your choice - Use soy sauce, tamari, or coconut aminos depending on what you already enjoy or your dietary preferences. Tamari and coconut aminos are both gluten-free. Coconut aminos is also soy-free.
  • Honey or maple syrup - Even though this recipe calls for honey, we've also tested it with maple syrup and it works great too! Feel free to sub it 1:1 with honey.

How do I store leftovers?

You can store any leftovers in an airtight container for up to 3 days in the fridge.

Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

This Honey Soy Glazed Salmon is simple, yet so delicious. Fresh grilled or pan seared salmon fillets are topped with a flavorful glaze that you’ll want to eat on repeat. #SalmonRecipes #HoneySoy #Grilling #Umami
Honey Soy Glazed Salmon 1 scaled
Print Recipe
4.80 from 5 votes

Honey Soy Glazed Salmon

This Honey Soy Glazed Salmon is simple, yet so delicious. Fresh grilled, pan seared, or baked salmon fillets are topped with a flavorful glaze that you'll want to eat on repeat this summer.
Prep Time10 minutes mins
Cook Time20 minutes mins
Total Time30 minutes mins
Cuisine: Asian
Keyword: grill, protein, salmon
Servings: 4 servings
Calories: 380kcal
Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

Ingredients

  • ½ cup honey (can also sub with maple syrup)
  • ½ cup sauce of your choice (low sodium soy sauce, tamari, or coconut aminos)
  • 2 tablespoons rice vinegar
  • 1 tablespoon grated fresh ginger
  • 1 tablespoon grated fresh garlic, about 2 cloves
  • 1 tablespoon sesame seeds
  • 1 whole pound salmon fillet or 4 - 4 ounce salmon fillets
  • Freshly ground black pepper, to taste
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil or avocado oil, for cooking
  • Cooked jasmine rice, for serving
instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

Instructions

Glaze Instructions:

  • In a small pot, whisk together honey, sauce of your choice, rice vinegar, ginger, garlic, and sesame seeds until well combined.
  • Pour half of the mixture over the salmon fillets in a sealable bag or glass container and let marinate for 15 minutes.
  • With the remaining sauce in the pot, bring to medium heat. Stirring often, cook the sauce until it's slightly thickened into a glaze, about 5-7 minutes.

Cooking Instructions:

  • To cook salmon on a pan: Heat oil in a large skillet over medium heat. Season the salmon fillets with pepper, then cook skin side down for 3-4 minutes. Flip and cook for another 3-4 minutes until the salmon flakes easily with a fork.
  • To cook salmon on the grill: Preheat grill to 400-450ºF. Rub oil all over the salmon fillets then season with pepper. Add salmon fillets skinless side down on the grill-this ensures you get those delicious grill marks on top. Cook for about 4-5 minutes, depending on the thickness of the fillet, then carefully flip onto the skin side. Cook for another 4-5 minutes until salmon flakes easily with a fork. Alternatively, you can wrap the salmon in foil and grill for 10-12 minutes.
  • To cook salmon in the oven: Preheat oven to 425ºF. Place salmon fillets skin side down on a baking sheet lined with parchment paper or greased with oil. Season with pepper then cook for 8-12 minutes, or until fish flakes easily with a fork.
  • To cook salmon in the air fryer: Preheat the air fryer to 400ºF. Place salmon fillets skin side down in an air fryer basket lined with parchment paper or greased with oil. Season with pepper then cook for 7-10 minutes, or until fish flakes easily with a fork.
  • After cooking: Spoon prepared soy glaze over cooked salmon fillets and serve over jasmine rice, if desired.

Notes

Note: Cooking times may vary based on the thickness and size of your salmon fillet.

Nutrition

Serving: 1g | Calories: 380kcal | Carbohydrates: 38g | Protein: 29g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 1300mg | Potassium: 570mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 35g | Calcium: 23mg | Iron: 1.4mg

save this honey soy glazed salmon recipe on pinterest:

4 1

Check out these other healthy salmon recipes:

  • Nut Crusted Salmon
  • Salmon with Pineapple Salsa
  • Grilled Mediterranean Bruschetta Salmon
  • Air Fryer Salmon Bites with Bang Bang Sauce

Sheet Pan Green Beans with Alfredo Sausage

November 16, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 12 Comments

This sheet pan green beans recipe is perfect for the busy holiday season when you're craving a comforting dish without the hassle. It contains flavorful Italian sausage, creamy alfredo sauce, and Libby's® Vegetables Naturals Cut Green Beans. Plus, you get to customize it with any cheese of your choice.

Sheet Pan Green Beans 4

Disclosure: This post is sponsored by Libby's® Vegetables. All opinions are my own; I never feature a brand that I don't love!

Table of Contents

  • Why you'll love it
  • What ingredients do you need?
  • How do you make sheet pan green beans with sausage?
  • Can I use fresh green beans instead of canned?
  • Recipe tips and tricks
  • Customize it your way
  • Making these cheesy green beans dish ahead of time
  • How do I store leftovers?
  • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
    • save this cheesy sheet pan green beans recipe on pinterest:
    • Want more? Try these other holiday side recipes:

Why you'll love it

Get ready to fall in love with the simplicity and rich flavor of this sheet pan green beans recipe! The Italian sausage provides a savory punch, while the alfredo sauce adds creaminess, making every bite heavenly. All you need is one skillet and one sheet pan, meaning there's minimal cleanup.

We're also using canned green beans as a nutritious, time saving option. Simply open, drain, and add to your sheet pan.

Sheet Pan Green Beans 5

Are canned green beans healthy?

Absolutely! Green beans are packed with essential vitamins and minerals. Here, I'm using Libby's Vegetables, which are grown by American farmers to provide exceptional taste and crisp-tender texture.       

For the recipe, we specifically chose to use Libby's Vegetables Naturals Cut Green Beans, which have no added salt. What's inside the can, you ask? Just green beans and water - that's it!

This is an ideal recipe to use canned green beans. Normally you would have to steam green beans before adding them to a sheet pan, but we get to skip that step with Libby's ready-to-go canned green beans!

Sheet Pan Green Beans
Sheet Pan Green Beans 6

What ingredients do you need?

Chances are that most of the ingredients you need are already in your kitchen. Here's what to grab:

  • Italian Sausage: Choose your favorite Italian sausage-it can be mild or hot. You could also opt for turkey or chicken sausage instead or pork if you prefer.
  • Alfredo Sauce: You'll find alfredo sauce in the pasta aisle of most grocery stores.
  • Libby's Vegetables Naturals Cut Green Beans: These canned green beans are convenient and delicious, making them a perfect addition to your holiday menu. Drain and pat them dry for the best results.
  • Italian Seasoning: A blend of oregano, basil, thyme, and other herbs-adds Italian flavor to your holiday dish. The aroma of these seasonings will fill your kitchen and make it smell SO good.
  • Cheese of your choice: The gooey, melted cheese adds an umami flavor in addition to extra protein.
  • Red Pepper Flakes: This recipe calls for just a small amount to give it a mild kick. Add a bit more if you like it spicier!

How do you make sheet pan green beans with sausage?

  • Add Green Beans: Once drained, spread these out in an even layer on a sheet pan and season.
  • Brown Sausage: We like to break up the sausage into tiny pieces before adding over the creamy alfredo sauce.
  • Assemble: Add the sausage mixture on top of the green beans and gently press down. Then top with cheese and bake.
  • Serve: The beauty of this sheet pan recipe is that it can be served as either a side dish or a main dish. See some pairing suggestions below.
Sheet Pan Green Beans 2
Sheet Pan Green Beans 3

Can I use fresh green beans instead of canned?

Yes! I prefer using canned to save time but fresh green beans work great in this recipe too. Start by trimming the ends off the green beans, then steam them for about 5-6 minutes or blanch them in boiling water for 3-4 minutes until they're tender-crisp. After cooking, drain them well and pat them dry with a clean towel or paper towel-this helps prevent extra moisture from watering down the dish.

From there, add them to the recipe just as you would the canned green beans. Fresh green beans provide a slightly firmer bite.

Recipe tips and tricks

  • Serving Tips: We love pairing this recipe with roasted fingerling potatoes or sweet potato cubes. It's also great with fresh rolls or a refreshing green salad.
  • Troubleshooting Tips: If you don't have a quarter sheet pan, you can also use a larger sheet pan and just nudge the ingredients together to resemble a 13"x9" shape.
  • Scaling Tips: Hosting a larger gathering? Feel free to double the recipe-just be sure to use a half sheet pan (~18″x13″) in this case.
Sheet Pan Green Beans 15

Customize it your way

Like all of my other recipes, this green bean dish is completely customizable. You get to choose what cheese you want to use.

  • Shredded cheese of your choice: Mozzarella is a classic choice, but feel free to experiment with other cheese varieties like parmesan, cheddar, or a blend.

Making these cheesy green beans dish ahead of time

To make it ahead of time, prepare the dish up until the baking step, cover it tightly, and refrigerate for up to 2 days. When you're ready to enjoy, simply pop it in the oven, and voila! It's ideal for meal prepping or making ahead for a busy holiday celebration or weeknight.

Sheet Pan Green Beans 7

How do I store leftovers?

You can store extras in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. To reheat, simply microwave for 1 minute.

Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

Sheet Pan Green Beans 13
Sheet Pan Green Beans 17
Print Recipe
5 from 3 votes

Sheet Pan Green Beans with Alfredo Sausage

This sheet pan green beans recipe is perfect for the busy holiday season when you're craving a comforting meal without the hassle. It contains flavorful Italian sausage, creamy alfredo sauce, and canned green beans. Plus, you get to customize it with any cheese of your choice.
Prep Time5 minutes mins
Cook Time30 minutes mins
Total Time35 minutes mins
Course: Appetizer & Side Dish Choices
Cuisine: American
Keyword: holiday, sheet pan
Servings: 8 servings
Calories: 310kcal
Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

Equipment

  • Quarter Sheet Pan (roughly 13"x9")

Ingredients

  • 1 - 16 ounce package Italian sausage
  • ½ cup alfredo sauce
  • 2 cans (14.5 oz. each) Libby's Naturals Cut Green Beans, drained and pat dry
  • 3 teaspoons italian seasoning, divided
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 ½ cups or 5 ounces shredded cheese of your choice (Pictured is mozzarella cheese but you could also use parmesan, cheddar, or a blend.)
  • ½ teaspoon red pepper flakes
instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 425ºF. Line a quarter sheet pan (roughly 13"x9") with parchment paper or grease with cooking spray.
  • In a large skillet over medium heat, brown the sausage for 5-6 minutes, breaking it into small pieces. Stir in the alfredo sauce and 1 teaspoon of Italian seasoning, cooking for an additional 2 minutes until warmed.
  • Add drained green beans to the prepared sheet pan and season with the remaining 2 teaspoons of the Italian seasoning and black pepper.
  • Top the green beans with the alfredo sausage mixture, pressing it down gently, and then top with shredded cheese.
  • Bake for 15-20 minutes until the cheese is golden brown on top. Remove from oven and top with red pepper flakes before serving.

Video

View this post on Instagram

A post shared by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN | Culinary + Media Dietitian (@cheerfulchoices)

Notes

You can also view this recipe on Libby's Vegetables website here.

Nutrition

Serving: 1serving (about 4x4" piece) | Calories: 310kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 17g | Fat: 25g | Saturated Fat: 11g | Sodium: 680mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g

save this cheesy sheet pan green beans recipe on pinterest:

Sheet Pan Green Beans with Alfredo Sausage Pinterest Regular Pins

Want more? Try these other holiday side recipes:

  • Corn Fritters
  • Creamy Corn & Pea Pasta Salad
  • Air Fryer Edamame with Brussels Sprouts

Air Fryer Corn Fritters

November 15, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 3 Comments

These air fryer corn fritters are the perfect side for the busy holiday season. They contain the goodness of Libby's Whole Kernel Sweet Corn alongside your favorite cheese and seasonings, served with a smoked paprika maple aioli for dipping. Plus, they're made in the air fryer for a lighter take on this indulgent classic.

Air Fryer Corn Fritters 7

Disclosure: This post is sponsored by Libby's® Vegetables. All opinions are my own; I never feature a brand that I don't love!

Table of Contents

  • Why you'll love it
  • Is canned corn healthy?
  • How do you make air fryer corn fritters?
  • Recipe tips and tricks
  • Customize it your way
  • Dip options
  • Making this fritters recipe ahead of time
  • How do I store leftovers?

Why you'll love it

Imagine biting into a crispy, golden fritter with a burst of sweet corn in every bite! These air fryer corn fritters are a taste sensation. They're quick to make, customizable, and perfect for both beginners and seasoned cooks. Whether you're hosting a holiday gathering or just want a cozy snack, these fritters will become your go-to option.

Air Fryer Corn Fritters 5

Perfect for the holidays

In the whirlwind of the holidays when your oven's full and you're short on time-these fritters will save the day. Thanks to Libby's Vegetables, there's no washing, peeling, or dicing involved. Simply open, drain, and mix. Since the prep work is done for you, you can spend more time with those who matter most: friends and family.

Not only do these fritters save you precious time, but they're also cost-efficient, adding flavorful value to your dishes without breaking the bank.

Air Fryer Corn Fritters 12

Is canned corn healthy?

Absolutely! Libby's is made with US-grown corn and is picked at the peak of ripeness and canned within hours, sealing in the nutrients and flavor.      

What's inside the can? Just corn, water, and sea salt! That's right-no preservatives or added sugars.      

Canned corn is super versatile too. Serve as a standalone side dish or incorporate into delicious recipes that come together in no time, like a taco salad or these fritters.

Air Fryer Corn Fritters 11

How do you make air fryer corn fritters?

Here's how to throw together these fritters in less than 30 minutes.

  • Mix It Up: Combine your dry ingredients, add corn and egg, and voila - your batter is ready.
  • Shape and Fry: Shape into fritters, pop in the air fryer, and cook until golden perfection is achieved.
  • Whip Up the Aioli: While your fritters cook, mix Greek yogurt, mayo, lemon juice, garlic, maple syrup, and smoked paprika for the perfect dipping sauce.
Air Fryer Corn Fritters
Air Fryer Corn Fritters 1
Air Fryer Corn Fritters 3

Recipe tips and tricks

  • Serving Tips: Pair your fritters with a fresh salad and cooked protein for a well-rounded meal. You can also add to your holiday table as a fun and unique side dish that the whole family will love.
  • Troubleshooting Tips: If needed, you can add flour over your hands to help prevent sticking when forming the patties. If you find the corn fritter batter is a bit crumbly when trying to form the patties, don't fret. Simply form into thicker balls first, then place them in the air fryer basket and use a fork to press down into the thin 3-inch patty shape. As they cook, they become crispy and firm.
  • Scaling Tips: Easily double or triple the recipe for a party-you may just have to cook in a few different batches depending on the size of your air fryer.

Customize it your way

Like all of our other recipes, these fritters are completely customizable. You get to choose what cheese and seasonings you want to use.

  • Shredded cheese of your choice: We love to use a classic sharp cheddar cheese, but you could also use mozzarella, parmesan, Monterey jack, or whatever you have on hand.
  • Seasonings of your choice: We tend to use a mixture of garlic powder and everything bagel seasoning to fill up the 1 tablespoon total. You could also use paprika, onion powder, lemon pepper, or an all-purpose seasoning. Use what you enjoy and have in your pantry!

Dip options

For this fritter recipe, we're whipping up a slightly sweet and smoky aioli to use as a dip. You're also welcome to explore other dip options like a spicy Sriracha mayo, garlic herb sauce, cilantro lime crema, or ranch.

Air Fryer Corn Fritters 9

Making this fritters recipe ahead of time

Feel free to prepare the batter a day before and then form into patties and air fry when you're ready. This make ahead prep makes this recipe ideal for the holidays.

How do I store leftovers?

Store leftovers in an airtight container for up to 3 days in the fridge. To reheat, simply pop them in the microwave for 30 seconds or air fry at 370°F for 3 minutes.

Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

Air Fryer Corn Fritters 4
Print Recipe
5 from 3 votes

Air Fryer Corn Fritters

These air fryer corn fritters are the perfect side for the busy holiday season. They contain the goodness of Libby's Whole Kernel Sweet Corn alongside your favorite cheese and seasonings, served with a smoked paprika maple aioli for dipping. Plus, they're made in the air fryer for a lighter take on this indulgent classic.
Prep Time15 minutes mins
Cook Time10 minutes mins
Total Time25 minutes mins
Course: Appetizer
Cuisine: American
Keyword: holiday
Servings: 8 fritters
Calories: 100kcal
Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

Ingredients

Fritter Ingredients:

  • ¼ cup all-purpose flour
  • ¼ cup breadcrumbs
  • ¼ cup shredded cheese of your choice (sharp cheddar, parmesan, mozzarella, etc.)
  • 1 tablespoon seasonings of your choice (garlic powder, everything bagel, paprika, or a mixture etc.)
  • 1 tablespoon fresh chopped chives or 1 teaspoon dried chives
  • ½ teaspoon baking powder
  • ½ teaspoon salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 - 15.25 ounce can Libby's Whole Kernel Sweet Corn, drained and patted dry with paper towel (about 1 ½ cups)
  • 1 large egg, beaten
  • Cooking spray

Maple Aioli Ingredients:

  • ¼ cup plain Greek yogurt
  • ¼ cup light mayonnaise
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice
  • 1 tablespoon pure maple syrup
  • 1 teaspoon garlic, minced (about 1 clove)
  • ½ teaspoon smoked paprika
  • Salt and pepper, to taste
instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

Instructions

  • In a mixing bowl, stir together flour, breadcrumbs, cheese, seasonings, chives, baking powder, salt, and pepper.
  • Then, add corn and egg and mix together with a fork until a thicker batter forms.
  • Using your hands, shape the batter into 8 thin fritters that are about 3 inches wide.*
  • Preheat your air fryer to 370°F (185°C) for about 2 minutes. Then, lightly spray the air fryer basket with cooking spray or use parchment liners to prevent sticking.
  • Add fritters to the air fryer and spray the tops of the fritters with a bit of cooking spray.
  • Cook for 8 minutes, flipping the fritters halfway through. You may need to work in batches depending on the size of your air fryer.
  • After cooking, let cool in the basket for 2 minutes before serving.
  • In a small bowl, mix all aioli ingredients together to serve with the fritters for dipping.

Video

https://www.instagram.com/p/CzrF79wrwGi/

Notes

*Batter Note: If you find the corn fritter batter is a bit crumbly, form into thicker balls first. Then place them in the air fryer basket and use a fork to press down into the thin 3-inch patty shape. As they cook, they become crispy and firm.
Storage Note: These fritters are best enjoyed fresh, but you can also store any leftovers in an airtight container for up to 3 days in the fridge. To reheat, simply pop in the microwave for 30 seconds or air fry at 370°F for 3 minutes.
You can also view this recipe on Libby’s Vegetables website here.

Nutrition

Serving: 1fritter | Calories: 100kcal | Carbohydrates: 13g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 4g | Sodium: 380mg | Potassium: 110mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 3g | Calcium: 63mg

Want more? Try these other holiday recipes

  • Accordion Sweet Potatoes
  • Corn & Cheese Mini Tarts
  • Cheesy Corn and Rice Casserole
  • Deconstructed Chicken Pot Pie
  • Sheet Pan Turkey Tenderloin
  • Air Fryer Egg Rolls - with leftover turkey

save this corn fritters recipe on pinterest:

Pinterest Mackenzie will do

Three Cheese Mac and Cheese - Baked with Breadcrumbs!

November 14, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 8 Comments

Sharp cheddar, muenster, and asiago makes for an indulgent, three cheese mac and cheese. Sprinkle on homemade breadcrumbs and bake to perfection! Feel to to customize by using any milk of your choice.

Three Cheese Mac and Cheese

Table of Contents

  • Are there healthier swaps you can do?
  • Can I make these into bites?
  • How to make bread crumbs for mac and cheese
    • Looking for more hands-on help in the kitchen?
  • save this three cheese mac and cheese recipe on pinterest:

This post was first published on May 15, 2021. It was updated on July 27, 2022 [to include new photos and helpful tips.

I've been making this homemade three cheese mac and cheese ever since I was a little girl. In my house, it's named after Cheerful Choices owner ,Mackenzie, and known as "Mack's Mac and Cheese." We've made this recipe countless times and it is always a crowd pleaser! We love serving this dish alongside a light salad or some air fried green beans.

Are there healthier swaps you can do?

Macaroni and cheese is a classic comfort food dish. It's the perfect combo of creamy, cheesy pasta goodness. However, there are a few things you can do to give it a little bit of a nutrition boost.

  • Swap out the white pasta and white breadcrumbs for their whole grain counterparts. "Whole" grains have the bran, germ, and endosperm (AKA all the good parts filled with fiber, vitamins, and minerals) whereas white or "refined" grains undergo a process that removes the germ and bran.
  • You can also use skim milk and reduced-fat cheddar cheese because these items provide the same level of protein while reducing the saturated fat content. If you're looking to stay indulgent though, use whole milk and regular cheddar cheese.

Can I make these into bites?

If you're looking for the perfect party appetizer, you can easily turn these into mac and cheese bites! Simply divide them among lined muffin tins, sprinkle with breadcrumbs, and bake at 350 for 15-20 minutes. I also like to stir in a bit of riced cauliflower with the cheese sauce to pump up the nutrition of this mac and cheese without changing the flavor.

Cauliflower Mac and Cheese Bites

How to make bread crumbs for mac and cheese

Skip the store bought stuff and make your own breadcrumbs. Simply rip up whole grain bread slices into pieces. Then, toast them for 10 minutes at 350 degrees until slightly golden. Finally, use your hands to crush them up into smaller pieces to sprinkle over the mac and cheese before baking.

Breadcrumbs
Sharp cheddar, muenster, and asiago makes for an indulgent, three cheese Homemade Breadcrumb Baked Mac and Cheese. Some simple healthy recipe swaps help reduce the fat, maintain the protein and increase the fiber content of this classic recipe.
Breadcrumbs 1

Looking for more hands-on help in the kitchen?

You've come to the right place. It's my biggest passion to help busy people with minimal cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen. Click here to learn more about my virtual nutrition Coaching + Cooking program!

Sharp cheddar, muenster, and asiago makes for an indulgent, three cheese Homemade Breadcrumb Baked Mac and Cheese. Some simple healthy recipe swaps help reduce the fat, maintain the protein and increase the fiber content of this classic recipe.
Print Recipe
4.67 from 6 votes

Breadcrumb Baked Mac and Cheese

Sharp cheddar, muenster, and asiago makes for an indulgent, three cheese mac and cheese. Sprinkle on homemade breadcrumbs and bake to perfection!
Prep Time20 minutes mins
Cook Time20 minutes mins
Total Time40 minutes mins
Cuisine: American
Keyword: cheese, mac and cheese, protein, vegetarian, whole grains
Servings: 12 servings
Calories: 370kcal
Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

Ingredients

  • 3 cups uncooked whole grain elbow macaroni
  • ½ cup (1 stick) unsalted butter
  • ½ teaspoon salt
  • ¼ teaspoon pepper
  • 6 tablespoons flour
  • 3 cups dairy milk of your choice (skim milk, 2% milk, or whole milk)
  • 4 oz Muenster cheese, shredded
  • 4 ounces Asiago cheese, shredded
  • 8 ounces sharp cheddar cheese, shredded
  • 2 cups whole wheat breadcrumbs or 3 slices whole grain bread **see note
instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 350 degrees. Lightly grease a 2-quart baking dish.
  • In a large pan, cook macaroni to al dente according to package instructions. Drain and set aside.
  • In a small saucepan, melt butter. Stir in salt, pepper, and flour until combined.
  • Slowly pour in milk and bring to a boil. Let simmer for 2 minutes, then reduce to low heat and stir in all cheeses until creamy. Pour cheese sauce over drained pasta and stir gently to combine.
  • Pour macaroni in the prepared baking dish. Top with breadcrumbs and bake at 350 degrees for 20 minutes or until cheese is bubbly.

Notes

** We love to make homemade breadcrumbs. Simply rip bread into medium-sized pieces and pop it into the 350 degrees pre-heated oven for 10 minutes while you prepare the pasta and cheese sauce. Then, pull it out of the oven and crush it up into small pieces to sprinkle over the mac and cheese.

Nutrition

Serving: 1g | Calories: 370kcal | Carbohydrates: 32g | Protein: 16g | Fat: 21g | Saturated Fat: 13g | Cholesterol: 50mg | Sodium: 430mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 4g

save this three cheese mac and cheese recipe on pinterest:

Three cheese mac and cheese with cheddar, muenster, and asiago

Roast Beef Sliders

October 27, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

These mouthwatering Roast Beef Sliders are perfect for busy professionals and food enthusiasts alike. It's the perfect way to use up leftover cooked steak, beef tenderloin, or even deli roast beef meat. Plus, you get to customize it with your favorite sauces and greens.

Holding slider with cooked beef

Disclosure: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. Thanks so much for your support! See my disclosure policy for more details.

Table of Contents

  • Why you'll love it
  • What ingredients do you need?
    • Can you use beef tenderloin?
  • How do you make these roast beef sliders?
    • Optional cooking step
  • Recipe tips and tricks
  • Customize it your way
  • Making roast beef sliders ahead of time
  • Want more? Try these other party-ready recipes:

Why you'll love it

There's something irresistibly satisfying about these sliders. Picture this: succulent beef, melted provolone cheese, and crisp greens, all sandwiched between the sweet Hawaiian rolls. It's truly a flavor explosion in every bite!

These sliders are incredibly easy to make too. Perfect for lazy lunches, quick dinners, or even a delightful addition to your party menu.

Slider on a wood platter

Are roast beef sliders healthy?

We're all about balance here at Cheerful Choices. So while these sliders are definitely decadent, it's also still a way to reach your protein goals while also sneaking in some greens. For a balanced meal, we recommend serving these slides alongside other nutrient-packed sides like a quinoa salad, veggies and hummus, or roasted squash.

Beef tenderloin slider

What ingredients do you need?

  • Hawaiian Rolls: These sweet, soft buns add a delightful contrast to the savory fillings. For a bit of extra fiber, you can also opt for whole grain slider buns.
  • Sauce of Your Choice: Whether it's light mayo, zesty horseradish, or classic gravy, your sauce sets the flavor tone. Opt for low-fat options to keep it healthy.
  • Provolone Cheese: Melted provolone adds a creamy texture that complements the beef's flavor.
  • Cooked Beef: Roast beef slices or any tender cut work wonders. You can prepare these in advance or use leftovers for a quick meal. Here, we're using leftover beef tenderloin. You could also swap for another meat like cooked and sliced turkey or chicken.
  • Leafy Greens: Choose your favorite greens, such as crisp spinach or peppery arugula. These provide a burst of freshness and essential nutrients.

Can you use beef tenderloin?

We love using leftover beef tenderloin for this recipe because it's super tender. Beef tenderloin is often served during the holidays but it always makes a HUGE amount. If you have leftovers you're looking to transform, look no further than these sliders!

Beef tenderloin
Beef tenderloin

How do you make these roast beef sliders?

Whether you're making a tenderloin sandwich or using roast beef, here's how to make it:

  • Slice Slider Buns: Carefully halve the Hawaiian rolls horizontally.
  • Spread the Sauce: On the bottom halves, spread your chosen sauce generously.
  • Add Provolone: Place a folded provolone slice on the sauced buns.
  • Layer the Beef: Add 2 ounces of cooked beef on top of the cheese.
  • Add Greens: Finish with a handful of your selected leafy greens.
  • Top and Secure: Place the other half of the bun on the greens and gently press down. Secure your slider with a toothpick.
Beef tenderloin sandwich

Optional cooking step

If you prefer a warmer slider, we recommend heating it up after preparing it. Here are the two methods to try:

  • Air fry the slider at 350ºF for 4-5 minutes until cheese is melted and meat is warmed through. Keep an eye on this one as the slider bun can quickly go from toasted to burnt.
  • Bake in a toaster oven or regular oven at 350ºF for 8-10 minutes until cheese is melted and meat is warmed through.
Uncooked slider vs cooked slider
Uncooked slider vs cooked slider

Recipe tips and tricks

  • Serving Tips: Pair these sliders with a crisp salad, sweet potato fries, or a refreshing fruit platter. 
  • Troubleshooting Tips: If your sliders are feeling a bit dry, a drizzle of olive oil on the beef before assembly can add moisture. Too messy? Wrap your sliders in parchment paper for a neater eating experience.
  • Scaling Tips: Easily double or triple the recipe for parties. Hawaiian rolls come in packs of 12 so if you tripled the recipe you'll end up using all 12 buns!

Customize it your way

Like all of my other recipes here at Cheerful Choices, these sliders are completely customizable. You get to choose what sauce and greens you want to use. Here are some ideas:

  • Sauce of your choice: Light mayo, horseradish, mustard, gravy, barbecue sauce, or a creamy aioli are all welcome here! Feel free to use more than 1 teaspoon per slider if you like things saucier.
  • Greens of your choice: If you're heating up the slider, I recommend using a green that still tastes good when wilted slightly such as spinach, arugula, or kale. Otherwise, you could also use a more delicate green like butter lettuce or romaine leaves.

Making roast beef sliders ahead of time

These sliders are incredibly convenient as you can prepare them up to 1 day before your special occasion. If warming them up, wait to cook them until right before serving.

Holding toasted Roast beef sliders

How do I store leftovers?

Store your leftover sliders in an airtight container for 2-3 days in the fridge.

Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

Roast Beef Sliders 2
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Roast Beef Sliders

This slider is the perfect way to use up leftover cooked steak, beef tenderloin, or even deli roast beef meat. Plus, you get to customize it with your favorite sauces and greens.
Prep Time5 minutes mins
Optional Cook Time10 minutes mins
Course: Appetizer
Cuisine: American
Servings: 4 sliders
Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

Ingredients

  • 4 Hawaiian rolls, sliced in half
  • 4 teaspoons sauce of your choice (light mayo, horseradish, mustard, etc.)
  • 4 slices provolone cheese, folded into quarters
  • 8 ounces cooked and sliced beef (such as leftover cooked steak or deli roast beef cuts)
  • 1 cup leafy greens of your choice (If you're heating up the slider, I recommend using a green that still tastes good when wilted slightly such as spinach, arugula, or kale.)
instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

Instructions

  • Spread 1 teaspoon sauce over one side of the slider bun. Then, top with 1 slice provolone cheese, ~2 ounces beef, and a handful of leafy greens per slider.
  • Add over the top slider bun, gently press down with hands, and secure with a toothpick. Repeat with remaining sliders.
  • Store sliders for 2-3 days in the fridge.
  • Optional cooking instructions: Air fry the slider at 350ºF for 4-5 minutes or bake in a toaster oven at 350ºF for 8-10 minutes until cheese is melted and meat is warmed through.

Video

save this party slider recipe on pinterest:

Holding Roast beef sliders

Want more? Try these other party-ready recipes:

  • Bruschetta Trio
  • Baked Mac and Cheese
  • Goat Cheese Caprese Dip

Customizable Microwave Chia Seed Jam

October 27, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 2 Comments

You won't go back to store bought jam after making this incredibly easy Customizable Chia Seed Jam. This recipe calls for just 2 ingredients and takes less than 5 minutes to make in the microwave. Plus, it's naturally gluten-free, vegan, and has no added sugars! It's a great recipe to make at home to use up any fresh, frozen, or canned fruit on hand.

Chia jam in a clear bowl

Table of Contents

  • What is chia seed jam?
  • How to make microwave chia jam
    • First, warm up your fruit
    • Then, stir in your chia seeds
  • What can you use chia jam for?
  • Customize it your way
  • Should I use fresh, frozen, or canned fruit?
  • Does this jam have added sugar?
  • How to store chia jam leftovers
  • How many servings does it make?

This post was first published on April 8, 2020. It was updated on October 27, 2023 to include new photos and helpful tips.

What is chia seed jam?

Chia seed jam is a nutritious spread made by blending fresh fruit with chia seeds. These tiny seeds have a unique natural gelling property that thickens the mixture into a jam-like consistency, eliminating the need for pectin. Chia seed jam is not only delicious but also incredibly healthy.

Chia seeds provide great fiber, omega-3 fatty acids, and key nutrients like calcium and phosphorus. 

Chia seeds and berries
Chia seeds and berries mashed in bowl

How to make microwave chia jam

Here's how to make this super easy 2 Ingredient Chia Seed Jam.

First, warm up your fruit

You can heat your fruit in the microwave or over the stove. You just need to heat the fruit through enough so that it starts to break down and is easy to mash. Mash the fruit until it is mostly liquid with some fruit chunks left. If you like a smoother jam, you can blend your fruit in a food processor before adding the chia seeds.

Then, stir in your chia seeds

When you add the chia seeds in, it will not thicken immediately. It takes about 2 hours or more for the chia seeds to absorb some of the liquid. We recommend letting the jam sit overnight for the best texture. This makes it ideal to meal prep ahead of time!

This Customizable Chia Seed Jam is a great way to use up any fresh or frozen fruit on hand. This recipe calls for just 2 ingredients and takes less than 5 minutes to make. Plus, it’s naturally gluten-free, vegan, and has no added sugars! #homemadejam #frozenfoods #easyrecipe #2ingredients

What can you use chia jam for?

You can use this jam for any recipe you would use regular jam for. I love to spoon this microwave chia jam over yogurt parfaits or overnight oats. It's also great in peanut butter and jelly sandwiches or served on breakfast charcuterie boards.

When it comes to dessert time, enjoy this jam over ice cream, french toast, or lathered over a slice of banana bread.

Don't be shy-feel free to enjoy this chia jam alone by the spoonful too. 

This Customizable Chia Seed Jam is a great way to use up any fresh or frozen fruit on hand. This recipe calls for just 2 ingredients and takes less than 5 minutes to make. Plus, it’s naturally gluten-free, vegan, and has no added sugars! #homemadejam #frozenfoods #easyrecipe #2ingredients

Customize it your way

Since this is a "Customizable" Chia Seed Jam, you can use any fruit you like for this recipe. Some of the best fruits for this jam are strawberries, blueberries, raspberries, blackberries, peaches, cherries, and apricots. Try to use soft, ripe fruit as this will break down the easiest. 

Should I use fresh, frozen, or canned fruit?

All forms of fruit are packed with great nutrition. For this jam, you can use fresh fruit but I even find that frozen fruit works best because it breaks down easier. Canned fruit tends to work well too, you may just have to mash it a bit more.

This chia jam is a great way to avoid food waste and throw in any of those bits of fruit that are on their last leg.

Does this jam have added sugar?

This jam relies on the natural sugars present in the fruit for its sweetness so there are no added sugars.

We find that this jam is sweet enough as is. However, sometimes if the fruit you are using is under ripe or not as sweet-you might want to mix in a spoonful of stevia, monk fruit, agave, maple syrup, or honey.

Mackenzie Burgess, RDN enjoying her chia seed jam recipe
Chia jam

How to store chia jam leftovers

To store leftover chia jam, transfer it into an airtight container and store in the fridge for up to 2 weeks, providing a delicious and healthy spread whenever you need it. You can also freeze this chia jam for up to 6 months. Simply add to a sealed container or ice cube trays to freeze.

Mason Jar Yogurt Parfait with chia jam

How many servings does it make?

This recipe makes 1 cup of chia jam which is generally 1-2 servings. Want more? Simply double or triple this recipe! Trust me, it's that good.

Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

Customizable Chia Seed Jam
Customizable Chia Jam 2 scaled
Print Recipe
4.70 from 10 votes

Customizable Chia Seed Jam

This Customizable Chia Seed Jam is a great way to use up any fresh or frozen fruit on hand. This recipe calls for just 2 ingredients and takes only a few minutes to make!
Prep Time5 minutes mins
Total Time5 minutes mins
Course: Breakfast Choices
Keyword: 2 ingredients, berries, breakfast, chia jam, easy recipe, jam
Servings: 1 cup
Calories: 100kcal
Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

Ingredients

  • 1 cup frozen or fresh ripened fruit of your choice (strawberries, blueberries, raspberries, blackberries, peaches, cherries, apricots, grapes**, or a combination)
  • 1 tablespoon chia seeds
instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

Instructions

  • Add fruit into a microwave safe bowl and microwave for 1-2 minutes until fruit is softened and starts to release some of its juices. Alternatively, you can heat fruit in a small saucepan over medium heat for about 10 minutes.
  • After heated, mash fruit with a fork or potato masher until fruit is mostly broken down with some chunks left.
  • Stir in chia seeds and let mixture set in the fridge for 2 hours or overnight. This allows time for the chia seeds to absorb the liquid and thicken into a jam.
  • Store any leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to one week or in the freezer for up to 3 months.

Video

Notes

**If you are using grapes, be sure to heat them in a saucepan rather than in the microwave. (See why here)

Nutrition

Serving: 1cup | Calories: 100kcal | Carbohydrates: 15g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 3g | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 8g

save this microwavable chia seed jam recipe on pinterest:

Save this Customizable Chia Seed Jam

Sheet Pan Turkey Tenderloin

October 25, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 6 Comments

This Holiday Turkey Sheet Pan Meal is the perfect hearty meal for the busy season. Simply add nut crusted turkey tenderloin, colorful veggies, and seasonings of your choice to a sheet pan and roast to golden perfection. This stress-free meal can be served as a Thanksgiving main dish or added to your weeknight dinner rotation.

Turkey Tenderloin 10

Disclosure: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. Thanks so much for your support! See my disclosure policy for more details.

Table of Contents

  • Why you'll love it
  • Is turkey tenderloin healthy?
  • This sheet pan meal is ideal for Thanksgiving
  • What ingredients do you need?
  • How do you make this sheet pan turkey tenderloin?
    • 1. Preheat and prepare
    • 2. Toss veggies
    • 3. Prepare turkey
    • 4. Rest and slice
  • Recipe tips and tricks
  • Customize it your way
  • Making this sheet pan turkey ahead of time
  • How do I store leftovers?
  • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
    • Want more? Try these other holiday-ready recipes

Why you'll love it

Here's what you're about to dive into: a mouthwatering lean turkey perfectly cooked with a honey dijon herb and nut crust. Then, on the other side of the pan, an assortment of potatoes, vibrant red bell peppers, and tender broccoli, all roasted to golden perfection.

The best part? It's all done on one sheet pan! This recipe is a game-changer for busy folks who are looking for a wholesome, holiday meal without spending hours in the kitchen.

Turkey Tenderloin 9

What is turkey tenderloin?

Turkey tenderloin is a boneless and skinless cut from the breast of the turkey, known for its tenderness and leanness. In our holiday inspired sheet pan meal, it serves as the star ingredient, providing a juicy and protein-packed element. Plus, turkey tenderloin is much smaller than a whole turkey so it cooks up in no time.

Is turkey tenderloin healthy?

Absolutely! Turkey tenderloin is high in lean protein and low in fat with only 1 gram of total fat per serving. It's also a great source of nutrients like vitamin B6 which is important for brain function; and selenium which is an essential component of proteins and enzymes.

Turkey Tenderloin 14

This sheet pan meal is ideal for Thanksgiving

Planning the perfect Thanksgiving or holiday feast just got easier with this turkey sheet pan meal. This one-pan wonder not only simplifies your holiday cooking but also ensures a moist and flavorful turkey without the hassle.

Impressive entree with minimal effort is what this turkey tenderloin is all about. And I know what you're thinking: It's the holidays, shouldn't I spend most of the day cooking?

Nah! A quicker entree like this one means you can spend less time in the kitchen and more time enjoying the festivities-a true holiday lifesaver! 

Turkey Tenderloin 1
Turkey Tenderloin 2

What ingredients do you need?

  • Turkey Breast Tenderloin: This can be a bit tricky to find sometimes. I recommend doing a quick Google search or call your local butcher to see who might have it near you. Once in the store, look for this in the poultry section. 
  • Baby Gold Potatoes: These small potatoes are creamy inside and roast beautifully, providing the ultimate comfort. Be sure to cut them into pretty small pieces so they roast all the way through.
  • Red Bell Pepper: Choose a vibrant, firm pepper for a burst of color and a hint of sweetness. You could also swap for a orange or yellow pepper.
  • Broccoli: To save time, opt for pre-cut florets in store. It adds a delightful crunch to your meal.
  • Dijon Mustard: This adds a zesty kick to your turkey and helps create a flavorful crust during roasting.
  • Honey: A natural sweetener that balances the flavors and gives the turkey a golden, caramelized finish.
  • Rosemary: Fresh rosemary elevates the dish with its fragrant aroma and earthy flavor. Save some to garnish with for that extra wow factor.
  • Chopped Nuts: These add a delightful crunch and healthy fats to the top of the turkey.
Turkey Tenderloin

How do you make this sheet pan turkey tenderloin?

Let's break down the steps to create this delectable holiday sheet pan meal.

1. Preheat and prepare

Preheat your oven to 425°F and line a large sheet pan with parchment paper.

Turkey Tenderloin 3

2. Toss veggies

Toss the baby gold potatoes, red bell pepper, and broccoli with oil, seasoning, salt, and pepper. Spread them on one side of the pan. If you want to skip extra dishes, you can mix the veggies with the oil and seasonings right there on the sheet pan.

Also, if one large sheet pan isn't big enough to fit all ingredients in a single, use two sheet pans: one sheet pan for the turkey and one sheet pan for the veggies.

Turkey Tenderloin 4
Turkey Tenderloin 5

3. Prepare turkey

Pat the turkey tenderloin dry and place it on the other side of the pan. Spread the dijon mustard, honey, rosemary, chopped nuts, salt, and pepper mixture over the turkey. Then, roast away!

Ideally if you have a wired probe thermometer, insert this into the turkey before adding it to the oven so you can achieve the perfect temperature. If you want to go by the book, cooking to 165ºF is the food safe temperature for poultry.

However, here's a quick tip for juicier turkey: pull the turkey out of the oven at 160ºF. Then, when you let it rest over foil for 5-10 minutes, it will come up to 165ºF with carry over cooking.

Turkey Tenderloin 13

4. Rest and slice

Let the pan rest under foil for 5 minutes, allowing the juices to redistribute for moist turkey. Then, slice the turkey and serve!

Recipe tips and tricks

  • Serving Tips: Pair this delightful meal with a side salad, rice, or enjoy it on its own. Feeling saucy? Try it with a drizzle of Honey Garlic Butter or a dollop of ketchup. 
  • Troubleshooting Tips: If you're doubling or tripling the recipe, use multiple sheet pans for even cooking. Be mindful of cook times as they might vary.
  • Scaling Tips: Doubling or tripling? Adjust the ingredients accordingly, keeping the ratios intact. This ensures your dish is perfectly seasoned and cooked.

Customize it your way

Like all of my other recipes, this turkey tenderloin sheet pan meal is completely customizable. You get to choose what seasonings and nuts you want to use.

  • Seasonings: Experiment seasoning the veggies with different spices like garlic powder or smoked paprika. You can even use premade seasoning blends like Cajun seasoning, lemon pepper, or everything bagel seasoning.
  • Nuts: This recipe is similar to my nut crusted salmon because you can use any nuts you enjoy best. Try chopped/sliced almonds, pecans, walnuts, or pistachios. 
Turkey Tenderloin 8

Making this sheet pan turkey ahead of time

You can prep the veggies and the turkey mixture a day in advance and store them separately in the fridge. When you're ready to cook, simply assemble everything on the sheet pan and pop it in the oven. Easy peasy!

How do I store leftovers?

Store leftovers in an airtight container for up to 3 days in the fridge. If you want to freeze some portions, ensure they're tightly sealed and enjoy within a month. To reheat, a few minutes in the oven or a quick zap in the microwave should do the trick. Just note, it may become a bit more dry when you microwave than when you first serve it.

Turkey Tenderloin 6

Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

Turkey Tenderloin 10
Print Recipe
5 from 5 votes

Sheet Pan Turkey Tenderloin

This stress-free meal can be served as a Thanksgiving main dish or added to your weeknight dinner rotation. Simply add crusted turkey breast tenderloin and colorful veggies of your choice to a sheet pan and roast to golden perfection.
Prep Time15 minutes mins
Cook Time30 minutes mins
Total Time45 minutes mins
Course: Main Dish Choices
Cuisine: American
Keyword: holiday
Servings: 6 servings
Calories: 330kcal
Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

Equipment

  • Wired Temperature Probe

Ingredients

Vegetable Ingredients:

  • 1 pound baby gold potatoes, quartered into small ½ inch pieces
  • 1 medium red bell pepper, cut into 1-inch cubes
  • 1 medium head of broccoli, cut into 1-inch florets (about 3 cups florets)
  • 3 tablespoons olive oil or avocado oil
  • 1 tablespoon seasoning blend of your choice (Italian seasoning, lemon pepper, blackening seasoning, garlic powder, etc.)
  • ½ teaspoon salt
  • ¼ teaspoon freshly ground black pepper

Turkey Ingredients:

  • 1 package, about 24 ounces turkey breast tenderloin
  • 2 tablespoons dijon mustard
  • 2 tablespoons honey
  • 1 tablespoon finely chopped rosemary
  • ½ cup chopped nuts of your choice (almonds, pecans, walnuts, etc.)
  • ½ teaspoon salt
  • ¼ teaspoon freshly ground black pepper
instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

Instructions

  • Preheat your oven to 425°F. Line a large 18"x13" sheet pan with parchment paper.
  • Vegetables: In a large bowl, combine potatoes, red pepper, and broccoli with oil, seasoning, salt. and pepper. Use tongs to toss until coated then add to the right side of the sheet pan.
  • Turkey: Add turkey tenderloin to the left side of the prepared sheet pan and pat dry with a paper towel. In a small bowl, mix together the dijon mustard, honey, rosemary, chopped nuts, salt, and pepper. Spoon this mixture over the turkey, being careful to not let it spill over the sides.
  • Bake everything for about 25-30 minutes or until the turkey is cooked through to an internal temperature of 165ºF and the potatoes are tender and golden brown. Be sure to toss the vegetables with tongs halfway through cooking for even browning.
  • Once done baking, remove pan from the oven, let rest under foil for 5 minutes to let the juices redistribute. Then, slice the turkey and serve.

Video

Notes

Sheet Pan Note: If one large sheet pan isn't big enough to fit all ingredients in a single, use two sheet pans (One for the turkey, and one for the veggies).
Temperature Note: It can be helpful to use a temperature probe that goes into the turkey and monitors the temperature as it bakes. For juicier turkey, you can also pull it out of the oven at 160ºF and let it rest under foil until it comes up to 165ºF with carry over cooking.

Nutrition

Calories: 330kcal | Carbohydrates: 29g | Protein: 25g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 1000mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 11g

save this sheet pan turkey tenderloin recipe on pinterest:

Turkey Tenderloin Pinterest Regular Pins

Want more? Try these other holiday-ready recipes

  • Lamb Meatballs with Tzatziki
  • Nut Crusted Salmon
  • Baked Barramundi Skillet Recipe
  • Air Fryer Green Beans
  • Roasted Fall Vegetables with Smoked Paprika Aioli

Sushi Cups

October 18, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 14 Comments

Sushi cups are perfect to have out as an appetizer or serve as a unique snack. They call for your favorite veggies, creamy avocado, and a drizzle of spicy mayo, all nestled in a springy rice cup. No baking involved!

Grabbing sushi bite from tray

Disclosure: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. Thanks so much for your support! See my disclosure policy for more details.

Table of Contents

  • Why you'll love it
  • What ingredients do you need?
  • What is "mukimame"?
  • How do you make sushi cups?
    • 1. Cook the rice 
    • 2. Press into cups
    • 3. Prepare veggies
    • 4. Assemble
  • Recipe tips and tricks
  • Customize it your way
  • Can I make sushi cups ahead of time?
  • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
    • save this easy sushi recipe on pinterest:
  • Want more? Try these other recipes with rice:

Why you'll love it

Imagine the goodness of sushi, but without the fuss of rolling it. These sushi cups are like bite-sized pockets of happiness. They're not just tasty; they're incredibly versatile, making them perfect for parties, quick lunches, or even a fancy dinner appetizer. And guess what? They are a breeze to make!

Are sushi cups healthy?

These sushi bites call for simple ingredients with vibrant veggies. Here's why they're a nourishing option.

  • Rice - Provides carbohydrates, our body's main source of energy.
  • Veggies - Packed with vitamins, minerals, and fiber for a healthy gut.
  • Avocado - Rich in healthy fats and potassium
  • Edamame - High in protein and fiber, keeping you full and satisfied.
  • Spicy Mayo - A light drizzle to add flavor without piling on calories.
Sushi cups on wooden tray

What ingredients do you need?

  • Sushi Rice - Choose a short-grain sushi rice. It's sticky and idea for shaping into cups.
  • Veggies - Fresh and crunchy, they add texture and nutrients.
  • Steamed Mukimame - You can find this in the frozen section.
  • Avocado - Creamy and nutritious, it adds a lovely richness.
  • Soy Sauce - For that umami flavor 
  • Mayonnaise - The base for our spicy mayo, use light mayo for a healthier twist.
  • Sriracha Sauce - Adds a spicy kick, adjust according to your heat preference.
  • Honey - For a touch of sweetness in your spicy mayo.
  • Sesame Oil - A small amount goes a long way, enhancing the overall flavor.
  • Black Sesame Seeds - For a sprinkle of color and a nutty taste.
Sushi cups on wooden tray with edamame

What is "mukimame"?

Mukimame is simply shelled edamame. I like buying it pre-shelled because it makes for less prep work. You'll find it in the frozen section next to edamame. If you can't find it, you can buy regular edamame pods. When ~15 edamame pods are shelled, you'll get the ¼ cup mukimame (shelled edamame) needed for the recipe. 

How do you make sushi cups?

These sushi cups come together in no time. Here's how to make them with no baking involved!

1. Cook the rice 

Simmer rice with water until tender. Be sure to rinse rice well.

Cooking sushi rice in a pan

2. Press into cups

Use a spoon or tablespoon to press into the cups. I recommend using silicone muffin liners if you have them.

Sushi rice cups
Rice cups

3. Prepare veggies

Combine chopped veggies, steamed edamame, and diced avocado with sauce of choice.

Mixing veggies together in bowl

4. Assemble

Spoon veggie mix over rice cups, drizzle with spicy mayo, and sprinkle black sesame seeds.

Sushi cups on wooden tray
Sushi cups on wooden tray with spicy mayo drizzled over

Recipe tips and tricks

  • Serving Tips: You can pair sushi cups pickled ginger or wasabi just like normal sushi. Green tea or sake complements the flavors perfectly too.
  • Troubleshooting Tips: If the rice is too sticky, wet your spoon while shaping the cups to prevent sticking. 
  • Scaling Tips: You can easily double the recipe for parties. You'll just need 2 muffin pans.

Customize it your way

Like all of my other recipes, these sushi cups are completely customizable. You get to choose what veggies and sauce you want to use. 

  • Veggies of your choice - Use veggies that can be eaten raw such as carrots, cucumber, bell peppers, or sprouts.
  • Sauce of your choice - Use soy sauce, tamari, or coconut aminos depending on what you already enjoy or your dietary preferences. Tamari and coconut aminos are both gluten-free. Feel free to experiment with different sauces too, like teriyaki or ponzu.
Sushi Cups with spicy mayo

Can I make sushi cups ahead of time?

Absolutely! You can prep the sushi cups 24 hours in advance and store them in an airtight container. They are best enjoyed within 2 days otherwise the rice can start to get a bit stale.

Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

Sushi Cups 6
Print Recipe
4.88 from 8 votes

Sushi Cups

Sushi cups are the perfect bite-sized appetizer or snack. Customize with any veggies of your choice!
Prep Time20 minutes mins
Cook Time20 minutes mins
Total Time40 minutes mins
Course: Appetizer
Cuisine: Asian
Keyword: no bake
Servings: 12 sushi cups
Calories: 110kcal
Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

Equipment

  • Silicone Baking Cups

Ingredients

Sushi Ingredients:

  • 1 cup sushi rice, rinsed
  • 1 ½ cups water
  • ½ cup finely chopped veggies of your choice (Use veggies that can be eaten raw such as carrots, cucumber, bell peppers, or sprouts)
  • ¼ cup steamed mukimame (aka shelled edamame)
  • ¼ cup diced avocado (~½ small avocado)
  • 1 tablespoon sauce of your choice (soy sauce, tamari, or coconut aminos)

Spicy Mayo Ingredients:

  • ¼ cup mayonnaise
  • 1 teaspoon Sriracha sauce, adjust to taste
  • 1 teaspoon coconut aminos or soy sauce
  • 1 teaspoon honey
  • ½ teaspoon sesame oil
  • Black sesame seeds, for garnish
instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

Instructions

  • In a medium pot, combine rinsed rice and water. Bring to a boil over high heat. Reduce the heat to low, cover, and simmer for 20 minutes or until the rice is cooked and water is absorbed. Remove from heat and let it cool slightly.
  • Press about 2 heaping tablespoons of cooked rice into each cup of a muffin tin. Press down to compact the rice. Place the muffin tin in the fridge and chill for 20 minutes, allowing the rice to set.*
  • In a mixing bowl, combine chopped veggies, steamed edamame, diced avocado, and coconut aminos or soy sauce. Mix well to combine the flavors.
  • In another bowl, whisk together all mayo ingredients. Adjust the Sriracha sauce to your desired level of spiciness.
  • Remove the rice cups from the fridge. Spoon a heaping tablespoon of the veggie filling over each rice cup. Drizzle spicy mayo over the top of the veggies and garnish with black sesame seeds.

Video

https://www.instagram.com/p/CxtQ4QgPsMH/

Notes

*Prep Note: While the rice is in the fridge, prep the veggies and the mayo in Step 3 and 4.

Nutrition

Serving: 1sushi cup | Calories: 110kcal | Carbohydrates: 16g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 80mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g

save this easy sushi recipe on pinterest:

Sushi Cups with spicy mayo

Want more? Try these other recipes with rice:

  • Thai Peanut Rice Bowl
  • Instant Pot Chicken and Rice Soup
  • One Pot Brown Rice Jambalaya

Baked Barramundi Skillet Recipe

October 11, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

This Baked Barramundi recipe is the perfect one-pan recipe for a quick weeknight dinner or dinner party. Flaky Barramundi fish is paired with roasted cauliflower, seasonal squash, and a creamy tahini sauce that's divine.  Plus, you get to customize it with your favorite spices and veggies.

Baked Barramundi in one skillet

Disclosure: This post has been sponsored by the Aquaculture Stewardship Council. All opinions are my own; I never feature a brand that I don't love!

Table of Contents

  • Why you'll love it
  • Is Barramundi sustainable?
  • Is Barramundi healthy?
  • What ingredients do you need?
  • How do you make this Barramundi recipe?
    • 1. Preheat oven and mix
    • 2. Roast everything
    • 3. Drizzle in tahini
    • 4. Garnish and serve
  • Recipe tips and tricks
  • Customize it your way
  • Can you make this skillet ahead of time?
  • How do I store leftovers?
  • What to do with leftover chickpeas
    • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

    Why you'll love it

    This one pan recipe is a triple threat: it's delicious, healthy, and easy to make! 

    • Super Flavorful: The Barramundi fillets are flaky and tender, while the roasted veggies add a nice crunch. Finally, the tahini sauce adds a velvety texture that ties everything together.
    • Easy Elegance: Impress your guests or simply treat yourself to a gourmet weeknight meal without spending hours in the kitchen. It may seem like a long list of instructions but it's surprisingly simple to make!
    • Nutrient-Packed: The fish delivers healthy fats while the veggies and chickpeas provide vitamins, fiber, and plant-based protein, making this dish a nutritional powerhouse.

    What is Barramundi?

    The Better Fish® Barramundi is a white fish with a mild, sweet, and buttery flavor. I have it all the time over power bowls, fish tacos, or this skillet.

    Barramundi recipe on a plate

    Is Barramundi sustainable?

    Sustainability is very important to me when making food choices. That's why I recommend purchasing Barramundi that's certified as responsibly raised by the Aquaculture Stewardship Council (ASC). That sea green label on the bottom left corner means farms adhere to ASC's strict guidelines that help ensure the fish was raised in a responsible way, is traceable, and that growers care for the natural environment and support local communities. 

    This Barramundi by The Better Fish® is unique because it's transported by sea instead of airplane, which emits 90% less carbon and reduces food waste.

    The Better Fish® Barramundi is also farmed by ASC-Certified producer Australis Aquaculture at just one location. This makes for a consistent taste and sustainable seafood experience.

    Read more about their commitment to sustainability here.

    Barramundi bag
    Barramundi bag

    Is Barramundi healthy?

    As a dietitian, Barramundi is what I call a "superstar" in the seafood world. It's packed with heart-healthy omega-3s and complete protein while remaining low in calories and saturated fat. In fact, it actually has the highest omegas of any white fish (ALA, EPA, and DHA)! 

    Omega-3s can help support heart health and brain health.

    Research has consistently shown that a diet rich in omega-3 fatty acids, such as those found in Barramundi, may lower the risk of heart disease by reducing cholesterol, triglycerides, and blood pressure.

    Additionally, these essential fatty acids are known to play a crucial role in brain development and function, potentially reducing the risk of cognitive decline and disorders like dementia. 

    Barramundi bag next to skillet fillet

    What ingredients do you need?

    • Barramundi: You can find  Better Fish® Barramundi in the frozen section of your grocery store or you can stock up at Costco with their 2 pound pack.
    • Cauliflower: Head to the produce aisle for pre-chopped fresh cauliflower florets or pick up a whole cauliflower and chop it up yourself!
    • Squash or Sweet Potato: Hit the farmers' market for great seasonal squash options. You could also use sweet potatoes! There's sometimes even pre-chopped options in the produce section of your local grocery store. If you're cutting it yourself, check out this guide.
    • Chickpeas: Canned chickpeas are a pantry staple. Simply drain and rinse them before using.
    • Olive Oil: A good quality olive oil adds flavor and helps roast your veggies to perfection.
    • Spices: Get creative with your spice blend! Try Mediterranean classics like cumin and paprika or use a pre-made seasoning like za'atar.
    • Tahini: Available in most grocery stores, tahini is usually found in the international foods section. You can even buy it online.
    • Lemon Juice: Freshly squeezed lemon juice brings that zesty kick to your tahini sauce.
    • Garlic: You can either pick up fresh garlic or pre-minced garlic jars in the produce section. I typically recommend fresh but the jars are nice for time-savings!
    • Fresh Herbs: I like to sprinkle on fresh herbs, such as cilantro, at the end for that final hit of herbaceous flavor.
    Ingredients on a white marble backdrop

    How do you make this Barramundi recipe?

    This Baked Barramundi recipe comes together in just one hour, here's how to make it:

    1. Preheat oven and mix

    Preheat your oven to 400°F (200°C). Toss cauliflower, squash, and chickpeas with olive oil and spices. Make sure the squash are chopped into ½-inch cubes so they'll roast all the way through. If they are too big, they may end up being undercooked.

    Tossing together vegetables in a skillet
    Baking vegetables in a skillet

    2. Roast everything

    Roast those veggies for 25 minutes until they're golden and tender. Then, add Barramundi fillets and season. I often like to use my hands here to pat down the oil and spices on top. Bake for an additional 15 minutes.

    Fish fillet over skillet
    Fish fillet seasoned
    Baked Barramundi

    3. Drizzle in tahini

    While everything's baking, stir up the tahini sauce. Then, drizzle it over the dish and bake for an extra 5 minutes until it's slightly bubbly.

    Pouring tahini sauce over fish

    4. Garnish and serve

    Finish it all off with fresh herbs, and serve straight from the pan!

    Recipe tips and tricks

    • Optional Toppings: Since this recipe really leans into the Mediterranean flavors, you could add over other fresh topping such as avocado slices, pickled red onion, or even more lemon juice for extra acidity. 
    • Serving Tips: This skillet has a great balance of carbs, protein, and healthy fats so it can pretty much standalone for a full meal. However, you could also consider pairing it with a fresh salad or steamed rice.
    • Scaling Tips: You can definitely double this recipe for larger gatherings. However, in this case, I'd recommend turning it into one large sheet pan meal instead of a skillet.
    Barramundi Skillet served on a plate

    Customize it your way

    Like all of my other recipes, this Baked Barramundi is completely customizable. You get to choose what spices and veggies "of your choice" you want to use. 

    • Squash of your choice: Fall is the perfect time to experiment with different types of squash. Feel free to use a classic butternut squash or mix it up and try acorn, delicata, sugar pumpkin, or kabocha squash. I've even tested this with sweet potato and it turns out great. Just make sure all squash pieces are cut into similar ½-inch pieces so it cooks evenly.
    • Spices of your choice: Pictured here I used a pre-made seasoning called Za'atar. However, you can also get creative and use any mixture of Mediterranean spices like garlic powder, cumin, paprika, or coriander. Combine them until you reach a total of 2 tablespoons needed for this recipe.

    Can you make this skillet ahead of time?

    Somewhat! You can cut the veggies and tahini sauce in advance, then assemble and bake when you're ready.

    Taking spoonful of skillet

    How do I store leftovers?

    This skillet is best enjoyed right away but you can store any leftovers in an airtight container for up to 2 days in the fridge. Don't attempt to freeze this one.

    What to do with leftover chickpeas

    For this recipe, you'll end up with about ½ cup extra canned chickpeas. You can store them in an airtight container in the fridge until you're ready to use. They'll stay fresh in the fridge for about 3-4 days.

    Try tossing them in colorful salads, roast them in the air fryer for a crispy snack, or blend them into a creamy hummus. They'll stay fresh in the fridge for about 3-4 days.

    Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

    In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

    Baked Barramundi Recipe square
    Print Recipe
    5 from 1 vote

    Baked Barramundi Recipe - One Skillet with Roasted Vegetables and Tahini Sauce

    This Barramundi Skillet is the perfect one pan recipe for a quick weeknight dinner or holiday parties. Plus, you get to customize it with your favorite spices and seasonal squash.
    Prep Time15 minutes mins
    Cook Time45 minutes mins
    Total Time1 hour hr
    Course: Main Dish Choices
    Cuisine: Mediterranean
    Keyword: barramundi recipe
    Servings: 4 servings
    Calories: 400kcal
    Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

    Ingredients

    Skillet Ingredients:

    • 3 cups cauliflower florets (about ½ cauliflower head)
    • 2 cups winter squash of your choice or sweet potato (about 2 pound squash), diced into ½-inch cubes (Squash varieties you could choose include acorn, butternut, delicata, sugar pumpkin, or kabocha squash)
    • 1 cup (about ⅔ can) canned chickpeas, drained and rinsed
    • 3 tablespoons olive oil
    • 2 tablespoons spices of your choice, divided (Feel free to use a pre-made seasoning like Za'atar or a mixture of Mediterranean spices like garlic powder, cumin, paprika, coriander, etc.)
    • 4 4 ounce Barramundi fillets, thawed overnight or in cold water for 20 minutes
    • Salt and pepper, to taste

    Tahini Sauce Ingredients:

    • ¼ cup tahini
    • 5 tablespoons water, plus more as needed
    • 3 tablespoons lemon juice (about 1 large lemon)
    • 1 tablespoon garlic, minced (about 3 garlic cloves)
    • Salt and pepper, to taste

    For Garnish:

    • ¼ cup (or ~¼ bunch) fresh herbs of your choice (parsley, cilantro, etc.)
    • Lemon wedges, for squeezing
    instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

    Instructions

    • Preheat your oven to 400°F (200°C).
    • In a large cast iron skillet or oven safe pan, combine the cauliflower florets, diced squash or sweet potato, and chickpeas. Drizzle with olive oil, 1 tablespoon of the spices, and salt and pepper to taste. Use tongs to toss to coat evenly.
    • Place the skillet in the preheated oven and roast the vegetables and chickpeas for about 25 minutes or until they are slightly golden and tender.
    • Toss veggies once more then place Barramundi fillets on top of the roasted veggies. Sprinkle fillets evenly with the remaining 1 tablespoon of olive oil and remaining 1 tablespoon of spices.
    • Return the skillet to the oven and bake for an additional 15 minutes.
    • While everything is roasting, prepare the tahini sauce by whisking together all ingredients in a mason jar or liquid measuring cup. Add more water as needed to reach a pourable consistency.
    • Briefly remove the skillet from the oven. Drizzle over tahini sauce and bake for 5 more minutes, until the skillet is bubbly and fish easily flakes with a fork.
    • Before serving, top with fresh herbs and squeeze over lemon wedges, if desired. 

    Video

    https://www.instagram.com/p/CyWISxaLhIq/

    Notes

    Storage Note: This skillet is best enjoyed right away but you can store any leftovers in an airtight container for up to 2 days in the fridge.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 4servings | Calories: 400kcal | Carbohydrates: 27g | Protein: 29g | Fat: 21g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 270mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 6g

    save this baked barramundi skillet recipe on pinterest:

    One Skillet Meal with Barramundi recipe

    Want more? Try these other one pan, one pot recipes:

    • One Pot Tomato Basil Pasta
    • Customizable Chili
    • Shrimp Skillet

    Cauliflower Rice Protein Bowl

    October 3, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

    This Cauliflower Rice Protein Bowl recipe is a game-changer for looking for a quick weeknight meal packed with flavor and nutrition. This customizable bowl features a base of cauliflower rice topped with any protein and colorful veggies of your choice. Plus, you only need one cooking pan for easy clean up.

    Cauliflower Rice Protein Bowls with tofu or shrimp

    Disclosure: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. Thanks so much for your support! See my disclosure policy for more details.

    Table of Contents

    • Why you'll love it
    • Is this protein bowl healthy?
    • Ingredients you'll need:
    • How do you make this cauliflower rice protein bowl?
      • 1. Cooking chicken
      • 2. Cooking shrimp
      • 3. Cooking tofu
      • 4. Cooking canned beans
      • 4. Other protein options
      • Cook cauliflower rice and veggies
    • Tips and tricks
    • Customize it your way
      • Protein of your choice
      • Sauce of your choice
      • Veggies of your choice
    • Can I make this protein bowl ahead of time? 
    • How do I store leftovers? 
    • Want other riced cauliflower recipes? Try these:

    Why you'll love it

    Every time we've tested this Cauliflower Rice Protein Bowl, we've come to the same conclusion. It's super easy and always tastes delicious.

    Plus, it's a perfect recipe if you're looking to skip a grocery run and use up what you have on hand. You get to use your choice of protein (shrimp, chicken, tofu, black beans, chickpeas, etc.), and any of your favorite veggies on hand. That's right - show those veggies sitting in the back of your fridge some love. 😉

    Plus, with these options to customize, you can tailor this bowl to your unique taste preferences and dietary needs. Check out my customizable protein bowl template too.

    Cauliflower Rice Protein Bowl 16
    Shrimp protein bowl

    Is this protein bowl healthy?

    This Cauliflower Rice Protein Bowl is packed with nutrients! Cauliflower is low in calories but filled with fiber, vitamin C and folate, making it an fun alternative to traditional rice every so often. 

    The protein of your choice supports our muscles, while the colorful array of vegetables provides essential vitamins and minerals to keep our bodies healthy.

    The dish is finished off with healthy fats and vitamin E from the avocado slices. The monounsaturated fats found in avocados help support healthy cholesterol levels which can lower your risk of heart disease.

    Two Cauliflower Rice Protein Bowls

    Ingredients you'll need:

    • Cauliflower - This versatile vegetable is the star of the show, offering a low-carb alternative to traditional rice. You can find fresh cauliflower in the produce section of your local grocery store, or save time with pre-chopped cauliflower rice available in the frozen food aisle.
    • Protein - Pick your favorite protein to add a satisfying and protein-packed element to the bowl. For meat options, look for fresh or frozen varieties in the meat or seafood section. For plant-based options like tofu or black beans, check the canned goods or refrigerated tofu section.
    • Lime Juice - This zesty ingredient brings a burst of citrus flavor to the dish. Freshly squeezed lime juice offers the best taste, so grab a couple of juicy limes from the produce section.
    • Sauce - A umami-rich sauce enhances the overall savory taste. You can find soy sauce or gluten-free tamari in the Asian foods section of most grocery stores. We've also been enjoying using coconut aminos which is gluten-free and flower in sodium than most options.
    • Vegetables - Customize your bowl with a colorful array of extra vegetables. Don't hesitate to mix and match to your heart's content!
    • Cilantro - This fresh herb adds a pop of flavor and a delightful fragrance to the bowl. Find fresh cilantro near other fresh herbs in the produce section. You can even use a sprinkle of dried cilantro if you don't have fresh.
    • Avocado - Creamy and nutritious, avocado makes a fantastic topping. Look for ripe avocados that have a slightly softness when given gentle pressure.

    How do you make this cauliflower rice protein bowl?

    This cauliflower bowl is broken up into different steps, but comes together in no time. The main thing to pay attention to is the cooking time of various protein options you might use. Here we'll break down how you can cook each protein in a skillet over the stove top.

    1. Cooking chicken

    When cooking chicken, it's important to ensure it reaches 165ºF. You could also cut down on the cooking time by using pre-cooked chicken in the deli section. Either way, make sure to cut the chicken into small 1-inch cubes before cooking in a pan. 

    Cooked chicken: Cook for 3-4 minutes to warm up

    Uncooked (raw) chicken: Cook for ~6-7 minutes per side 

    Chicken
    Cooking chicken

    2. Cooking shrimp

    Shrimp cooks in a skillet very quickly so keep an eye on it to avoid overcooking. You could also use pre-cooked shrimp here.

    Cooked shrimp: Cook for 2 minutes to warm up

    Uncooked shrimp: Cook for 3-4 minutes

    Shrimp
    Cooking shrimp

    3. Cooking tofu

    I love using tofu in everything from tofu tacos to power bowls. You can buy it in bulk or just one package. Be sure to read this guide on how to press tofu before beginning. For this recipe, I like using my hands to crumble them up into pieces before cooking.

    Pressed and crumbled tofu: Cook for 6-8 minutes

    Tofu
    Cooking tofu

    4. Cooking canned beans

    Having canned beans in your pantry is a great way to have a protein-packed staple at the ready. You can use any type of canned bean such as black beans, garbanzo beans, or white beans. Cooking is optional, but it's nice to warm it up.

    Canned beans: Cook for 2 minutes to warm up in the skillet

    Beans

    4. Other protein options

    You might choose to use another protein option such as ground beef, plant-based meat, edamame, eggs, or others. Look up a simple guide to cooking these in a skillet, then feel free to use it in Step 2 of this recipe. 

    Cook cauliflower rice and veggies

    After you've cooked your protein, add it alongside the browned cauliflower rice and veggies. You can do this in the same pan you cooked your protein in to save on dishes!

    Cooking cauliflower rice
    Cauliflower Rice Protein Bowl 10

    Tips and tricks

    • Serving Tips: This Cauliflower Rice Protein Bowl is delicious on its own, but you can also serve it with a dollop of Greek yogurt or a drizzle of hot sauce for added creaminess or heat. We also often like to serve with tortilla chips for extra crunch!
    • Troubleshooting Tips: If you're finding yourself in need of more flavor add the end, feel free to add an extra splash of soy sauce or season with salt and pepper.
    • Scaling Tips: Feel free to double or triple the ingredient quantities based on your desired serving size.

    Customize it your way

    Like all of my other recipes, this cauliflower bowl is completely customizable. You get to choose what protein, sauce, and veggies you want to use.

    Protein of your choice

    Here are some popular options for these bowls. See cooking instructions for these options above!

    • Chicken 
    • Shrimp
    • Tofu
    • Canned beans

    Sauce of your choice

    There are 4 different types of umami based sauces that work well for this recipe:

    • Soy sauce or low sodium version (contains gluten and soy)
    • Tamari (gluten-free)
    • Coconut aminos (gluten-free and soy-free)
    • Yondu Vegetable Umami (gluten-free)
    Crumbled tofu in a bowl

    Veggies of your choice

    Along with the cauliflower, feel free to saute any additional quick-cooking veggies of your choice. Here are some ideas that pair well with the southwest flavors:

    • Bell peppers
    • Zucchini
    • Yellow squash
    • Corn
    • Kale
    • Tomatoes
    Cauliflower Rice Protein Bowls on white backdrop

    Can I make this protein bowl ahead of time? 

    Absolutely! Feel free to cook up this recipe and then divide the components among 4 meal prep containers to enjoy throughout the week. 

    How do I store leftovers? 

    Store any leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days. When ready to serve, reheat in the microwave for about 2 minutes until warmed through.

    Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

    In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

    Cauliflower Rice Protein Bowl Feature scaled
    Print Recipe
    5 from 1 vote

    Cauliflower Rice Protein Bowl

    This customizable bowl features a base of cauliflower rice topped with any protein and colorful veggies of your choice. Plus, you only need one cooking pan for easy clean up.
    Prep Time10 minutes mins
    Cook Time15 minutes mins
    Total Time25 minutes mins
    Course: Main Dish Choices
    Cuisine: Mexican
    Keyword: protein bowl
    Servings: 4 servings
    Calories: 380kcal
    Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

    Ingredients

    • 14 to 16 ounces protein of your choice (shrimp, chicken, pressed and crumbled tofu, canned and drained black beans, chickpeas, etc.)
    • 1 teaspoon chili powder
    • 1 teaspoon cumin
    • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
    • 1 teaspoon onion powder
    • 2 tablespoons lime juice or about 1 lime, juiced - divided
    • 2 tablespoons sauce of your choice (soy sauce, tamari, or coconut aminos) - divided
    • 2 tablespoons avocado oil - divided
    • 3 cups fresh or frozen cauliflower rice* I typically use 1 -10 ounce bag
    • 3 cups vegetables of your choice, diced (peppers, zucchini, yellow squash, corn, kale, tomatoes, etc.)

    Garnish:

    • 4 tablespoons finely chopped cilantro or 1 tablespoon dried cilantro
    • 1 large ripe avocado, sliced
    • Lime wedges, for garnishing
    instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

    Instructions

    • In a large bowl combine protein, chili powder, cumin, garlic powder, onion powder, 1 tablespoon of the lime juice, and 1 tablespoon of the soy sauce. Mix until protein is fully coated with spices. 
    • Heat 1 tablespoon of the oil in a large pan to medium-high heat. Add protein to the pan and fully cook through.** Once the protein is cooked, transfer to a bowl covered with foil and set aside to stay warm.
    • To the same pan over medium-high heat, add 1 tablespoon of olive oil. Add the cauliflower rice and cook for about 5 to 6 minutes, stirring only occasionally, until the cauliflower is slightly crispy on the outside. 
    • Then to the cauliflower rice pan, add over vegetables of choice, remaining 1 tablespoon lime juice, and remaining 1 tablespoon soy sauce. Stir and sauté mixture for 3-4 minutes, until warmed through.
    • Once everything is cooked, distribute cauliflower veggie mixture among 4 serving bowls and top with the protein. Evenly garnish with cilantro, avocado, and lime.

    Video

    Notes

    *Cauliflower Rice Note: You can also make your own cauliflower rice by taking ~1 small head cauliflower (or ½ large head) and roughly chop into florets. Then, add this cauliflower into food processor and pulse until it's small and has the texture of rice.
    **Cooking Note: See the blog post above for specific cooking instructions for all protein options. Here is a general timing guideline:
    • Cooked chicken: Cook for 3-4 minutes to warm up
    • Uncooked chicken: Cook for ~6-7 minutes per side
    • Cooked shrimp: Cook for 2 minutes to warm up
    • Uncooked shrimp: Cook for 3-4 minutes
    • Pressed and crumbled tofu: Cook for 6-8 minutes
    • Canned beans: Cook for 2 minutes to warm up
    • Cooking another type of protein? Look up a basic cooking guide before adding into Step #2.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1serving | Calories: 380kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 39g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Cholesterol: 100mg | Sodium: 270mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 8g

    save this customizable protein bowl recipe on pinterest:

    Protein bowls recipe

    Want other riced cauliflower recipes? Try these:

    • Cauliflower Rice Risotto with Mushrooms
    • Baked Mac And Cheese Bites
    • Sheet Pan Cauliflower Fried Rice

    Air Fryer Egg Bites

    September 25, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

    These air fryer egg bites are perfect to take on-the-go or add to your weekend brunch board. They only take 20 minutes to make and pack in satisfying protein to power your day! Plus, you get to customize them with any veggies of your choice.

    Egg bites in air fryer basket

    Disclosure: This post has been sponsored by The American Egg Board. All opinions are my own; I never feature a brand that I don't love! See my disclosure policy for more details.

    Table of Contents

    • What are egg bites? 
    • Are egg bites nutritious?
    • Can eggs be part of a heart healthy?
    • How to make air fryer egg bites
      • Ingredients you'll need
      • What seasonings do you need?
      • 1. Mix ingredients
      • 2. Add to liners
      • 3. Place in air fryer and cook
      • 4. Add toppings
    • Tips and tricks
    • Customize it your way
    • What if I don't have an air fryer?
    • Can I make them ahead of time?
      • save this egg bites recipe on pinterest:
    • Want more? Try these other egg-forward recipes:
    • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

    What are egg bites? 

    Egg bites are a savory morsel made of eggs, cheese, and veggies-resembling muffins. They're often served at coffee shops or can be found in the store. Here we are making them homemade by whisking together simple ingredients and cooking in muffin liners. Oftentimes egg bites are baked in the oven, but for this recipe we are cooking them in the air fryer to cut time and provide for extra flavor.

    Egg bites on a white plate with avocado and green onions

    Why you'll love it

    This egg bites recipe is a versatile meal or snack option. We love how they're easy to make, packed with nutrients, and incredibly customizable. Making them in the air fryer gives you a golden brown top. Plus, air fryer egg bites are perfect for summertime so you don't have to heat up your oven.

    If you don't have an air fryer, you can also microwave them one-by-one for 60 seconds in a small mason jar. See the recipe card for the full instructions.

    You can even meal prep these egg bites ahead of time and store them in the fridge or freezer. If freezing, add them to an airtight bag or container and freeze for up to 3 months. Then, simply thaw the night before and reheat in the microwave when ready to enjoy.

    Whether you need a quick grab-and-go breakfast or a weekend brunch recipe, these egg bites have got you covered.

    Grabbing air fryer egg bite

    Are egg bites nutritious?

    These bites feature eggs as the star of the show! Eggs are a nutritional powerhouse with 6 grams of complete protein in just one large egg. Along with high quality protein, eggs also provide essential vitamins and minerals for healthy living. Learn more about the health benefits of eggs on my Customizable Bistro Box post!

    The addition of colorful vegetables in these egg bites further boosts the nutrient content too. All in all, you can feel good about adding this wholesome meal or snack into your weekly routine.

    Can eggs be part of a heart healthy?

    Yes! The cholesterol in food doesn't impact your body's cholesterol, therefore, eggs do not negatively impact heart health. In fact, according to the American Heart Association, healthy people can enjoy ~7 eggs per week as part of a heart-healthy diet.

    Other foods that make up a heart-healthy diet includes fruits and vegetables, whole grains, lean protein, and healthy fats.

    Want to learn more about eating for heart health? Check out this new Heart Health Handbook to help you learn about heart healthy eating, including six new recipes, plus a simple breakdown about the different types of cholesterol and the role it plays in the diet and in our bodies. Download it now!

    Heart Health Handbook

    How to make air fryer egg bites

    With this recipe, you'll whip up delectable air fryer egg bites in just 20 minutes. You only need 4 ingredients for the egg bites with 3 topping options.

    Ingredients you'll need

    • Eggs: A complete protein base and a brain supporter for every age and stage.
    • Milk: Adds creaminess and richness to the egg mixture.
    • Vegetables: Diced into ¼" pieces for bursts of texture and nutrition.
    • Cheese: Adds delicious, umami goodness to each bite.
    • Toppings: Gives extra depth and flavor to these egg bites.
    Ingredients on white backdrop

    What seasonings do you need?

    We are keeping it simple and using salt and pepper to season these muffin tin egg bites. However, you can definitely get creative and add a dash of everything bagel seasoning, garlic powder, or red pepper flakes. 

    1. Mix ingredients

    In a large bowl, whisk together the eggs, milk, vegetables, shredded cheese, salt, and pepper.

    Mixing eggs, cheese, and veggies

    2. Add to liners

    Distribute the egg mixture evenly among 12 silicone muffin liners, filling each about ⅔ full.

    Air fryer egg bites
    Air fryer egg bites in basket

    3. Place in air fryer and cook

    Gently place the muffin liners in the air fryer and bake for 10-12 minutes until the egg bites are cooked through. To check doneness, remove an egg bite with tongs - if it's still runny, cook for another 2-4 minutes. The USDA recommends cooking egg dishes to 160°F.

    Baking air fryer egg bites

    4. Add toppings

    Once they're perfectly cooked, top your egg bites with diced avocado, halved cherry tomatoes, and sliced green onions for an extra flavor punch and texture!

    Tips and tricks

    • Serving Tips: Enjoy your air fryer egg bites with a side of fresh fruit or a green smoothie for a balanced breakfast. 
    • Troubleshooting Tips:  To avoid overcooking and ending up with dry egg bites, start at the lower end of the cooking time range and then cook more if needed. Everyone's air fryer is slightly different with cook times.
    • Scaling Tips: Want to feed a crowd? Simply double or triple the recipe and cook in batches in the air fryer. These egg bites are perfect for meal prepping a bunch too!

    Customize it your way

    Like all of my other recipes, these egg bites are completely customizable. You get to choose what type of milk, cheese, and veggies you want to use.

    • Milk - You can use any variety of dairy milk like skim milk, 1%, or whole milk. If you're not a fan of dairy milk, you could also swap for plain, unsweetened plant milk.
    • Veggies - Use a variety of any colorful veggies you have on hand or enjoy. The only vegetables you would NOT want to use here are raw root vegetables like potatoes, beets, or carrots. These will be too hard and don't cook quick enough.
    • Cheese - This recipe calls for any shredded cheese you like. We love a classic shredded cheddar but feel free to use cheddar jack, mozzarella, gruyere, or another type of shredded cheese. 

    What if I don't have an air fryer?

    Alternatively, you can also microwave these egg bites. To do this, use 4 ounce mason jars and fill halfway. Then, microwave for 60 seconds to cook.

    Microwave Egg bites

    Can I make them ahead of time?

    Absolutely! These egg bites are meal prep friendly. Whip up a batch on Sunday and store them in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days. You'll have a nutritious breakfast ready to go each morning, even on your busiest days.

    Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

    In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

    Meal prep air fryer egg bites
    Egg Bites Recipe Square
    Print Recipe
    5 from 2 votes

    Air Fryer Egg Bites

    These air fryer egg bites are perfect to take on-the-go or add to your weekend brunch board. They only take 20 minutes to make and pack in satisfying protein to power your day! Plus, you get to customize this egg bites recipe with any veggies of your choice.
    Prep Time5 minutes mins
    Cook Time15 minutes mins
    Total Time20 minutes mins
    Course: Breakfast Choices
    Cuisine: American
    Servings: 12 egg bites
    Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

    Ingredients

    Egg Bites:

    • 6 large eggs
    • ¼ cup milk of your choice (skim milk, 1% milk, whole milk, or lactose-free milk)
    • 1 cup quick-cooking vegetables of your choice*, diced into ¼″ pieces (I like to do a mixture of bell peppers and spinach. You could also add other veggies like zucchini, yellow squash, broccoli, corn, kale, mushrooms, or onions. Don't be afraid to use what you have!)
    • ½ cup shredded cheese of your choice (cheddar, mozzarella, cheddar jack, gruyere, etc.)
    • Salt and pepper, to taste

    Toppings:

    • Ripe avocado, diced
    • Cherry tomatoes, halved
    • Green onions, sliced
    instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

    Instructions

    • Preheat air fryer to 300ºF. (Note: If air fryer doesn't have a preheat mode, simply let it heat for 2 minutes before adding the egg bites.)
    • Add all egg bite ingredients to a large bowl and whisk together.
    • Distribute egg mixture evenly among 12 silicone muffin liners, filing up each liner about ⅔ way full. This is about ¼ cup of the egg mixture per liner.
    • Use both hands or two tongs to gently place cups in air fryer basket and air fry for 10-12 minutes until cooked through. (Depending on the size of your air fryer, you may have to work in batches.)
    • Once the cooking is completed, be sure to check if it's complete by using two tongs to remove an egg cup. Then, use a knife to gently slice down the middle of one. If it's still runny, put back and cook for another 2 minutes.
    • Top egg bites with diced avocado, tomato, and green onions.
    • Store any leftover egg bites in an airtight container for up to 5 days in the fridge.

    Notes

    *Vegetable Note: The only vegetables you would NOT want to use here are raw root vegetables like potatoes, beets, or carrots. These will be too hard and don't cook quick enough.
    Microwave Note: If you don’t have an air fryer or want a quicker option, you can also microwave these egg bites. To do this, use 4 ounce mason jars and fill halfway. Then, microwave for 60 seconds to cook.

    save this egg bites recipe on pinterest:

    Taking a fork full of cheesy egg bites

    Want more? Try these other egg-forward recipes:

    • Make Ahead Egg Breakfast Burritos
    • Customizable Bistro Snack Box 
    • Easy Breakfast Tacos

    How to Wash Fruits and Vegetables

    August 18, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

    Learn how to wash produce to maintain the freshness and safety of your fruits and vegetables. In this comprehensive guide, we'll explore the best practices to ensure your produce is clean, free from contaminants, and ready to be enjoyed!

    (This post is written by Cheerful Choices contributor, Claire Cooney.)

    Washing kale under kitchen faucet

    Disclosure: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. Thanks so much for your support! See my disclosure policy for more details.

    Table of Contents

    • Importance of washing produce
    • What are pesticides?
    • How to wash fruits and vegetables
      • 1. How to wash greens
      • 2. How to wash berries
      • 3. How to wash soft skin fruits
      • 4. How to wash potatoes and root vegetables 
      • 5. How to wash produce with skin

    Importance of washing produce

    We all know fruits and vegetables are full of vitamins and nutrients that are essential to our health. However, it's also essential to thoroughly wash produce before eating it. This helps wash away any dirt, bacteria, and pesticides. 

    What are pesticides?

    The term, "pesticide," can have multiple uses. Pesticides are any substance that prevents insects or other animals from eating plants. It is also used to regulate plants, allowing them to grow in the correct proportions. Pesticides are even used to keep soil stable to ensure that it is supplying the plant with the necessary nutrients. 

    There are also pesticides containing chemicals that can be harmful too. One common pesticide used on the produce is organophosphate, which may negatively impact our nervous system and certain hormone functions after too much exposure. The main component in organophosphate works to kill enzymes in pests that aren't wanted near the growing produce. When left on fresh fruits and vegetables for human consumption, this same component may have a negative impact on our nervous system. More research is needed to confirm the full health effects.

    How to wash kale in the sink

    How to wash fruits and vegetables

    Here's how to properly cleanse produce to safely enjoy, elongate it's fridge life, and have prepped fruits and veggies ready to go!

    1. How to wash greens

    Leafy greens are items like spinach, arugula, and romaine lettuce. Greens should be washed in a strainer over cold running water for a few minutes to ensure that it's fully clean. Next, it is important to dry off the greens before storing in the refrigerator. Drying greens allows them to stay fresher for longer and are easier to season.

    The fastest way to do this is to utilize a salad spinner that will rid the greens of excess water. Your greens are now ready to be stored, add a paper towel to the bottom of your dish and they should stay fresh for up to one week. Try adding kale to one pot soups or adding leafy greens to a savory peanut salad.

    How to wash greens

    2. How to wash berries

    To wash berries, like strawberries, blueberries, blackberries, start with a cold water rinse. Next, soak the berries in a solution of 3 cups water to 1 cup apple cider vinegar. This will give the berries a longer fridge life so that you can enjoy them in dishes such as a healthy strawberry snack or this lemon blueberry mug cake!

    Watch how to wash blueberries with this quick video!

    How to wash berries

    3. How to wash soft skin fruits

    Soft skin fruits, like peaches, kiwi, mangos, and apples, need to be washed differently in order to ensure that the nutrient-rich skin remains intact. It's best to wash these fruits by running them under softer water pressure. We also love freezing these fruits to add to apple banana smoothies or yogurt parfaits.

    How to wash carrots

    4. How to wash potatoes and root vegetables 

    Root vegetables are harder veggies like potatoes, beets, and carrots. They grow in the ground so we often purchase these vegetables with a residual layer of dirt. 

    If you're not planning on peeling the root vegetable, it's essential to use a soft brush to scrub the vegetable in order to remove the dirt from the skin. Before and after using a brush, make sure to run the vegetable under cold water to properly cleanse the produce item of residual dirt. Try roasting root potatoes and serve with a smoked paprika aioli.

    How to wash potatoes

    5. How to wash produce with skin

    Many produce items with thicker skin may seem safe to eat right after purchasing. These are items like avocados, bananas, and oranges. However when you cut these fruits, the bacteria and pesticides can glide along with the knife into the edible parts of the fruit. Be sure to still clean these fruits and veggies under cold running water before peeling and enjoying. 

    Overall, properly washing your produce is essential to maintaining your health and keeping you safe from harmful bacterias and pesticides. Happy washing! 

    Need more help creating meals with fruits and veggies?

    In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

    share this "how to wash fruits and vegetables" guide on pinterest:

    How to wash fruits and vegetables
    Claire Headshot

    About the guest contributor: Claire is currently a third year student at Colorado State University studying Nutrition and Food Science. She is aiming to become a registered Dietitian in order to teach other people about the importance of nutrition in their everyday life. Claire also enjoys running, hiking, and exploring Colorado in her free time.

    No Bake Cheesecake Bites

    August 17, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

    These no bake cheesecake bites are so easy to whip up and use just one food processor for easy clean up. Made with a nutty crust, a creamy coconut milk filling, and toppings of your choice-these cheesecake cups are a sweet indulgence you can enjoy anytime.

    No bake cheesecake bites

    Disclosure: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. Thanks so much for your support! See my disclosure policy for more details.

    [ Disclosure: This post has been sponsored by XXX BRAND. All opinions are my own; I never feature a brand that I don't love! ]

    Table of Contents

    • What are no bake cheesecake bites? 
    • How to make cheesecake bites:
      • 1. Blend the crust
      • 2. Press crust into muffin liners
      • 3. Blend the filling
      • 4. Distribute filling over muffin liners
      • 5. Add over toppings
      • 5. Freeze until hardened
    • Tips and tricks
      • Customize it your way
    • What to do with extra coconut milk
    • Are they vegan?
    • Can you make cheesecake bites ahead of time? 
    • How do you store these no bake mini cheesecakes?
      • save this no bake cheesecake bite recipe on pinterest:
    • Want more easy desserts? Try these other recipes
    • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

    What are no bake cheesecake bites? 

    No bake cheesecake bites are just like they sound-mini cheesecake cups made without heating. Instead, the ingredients are layered and frozen into a solid bite. You'll also love them because they make for easy clean up.

    Are these cheesecake bites healthy?

    These cheesecake bites provide a creamy, rich taste while being loaded with nutrient-dense whole foods.

    One of the key ingredients in these cheesecake bites is raw nuts, which are an excellent source of healthy fats, protein, and fiber. Nuts have been shown to help lower cholesterol levels, reduce inflammation, and promote heart health. They are also a great source of vitamins and minerals, including vitamin E, magnesium, and zinc.

    Medjool dates, which are used to naturally sweeten the crust, are a great alternative to regular sugar. They're also packed with vitamins, minerals, and fiber. Dates are also a source of potassium and antioxidants.

    How to make cheesecake bites:

    1. Blend the crust

    Nuts of your choices and Medjool dates are the 2 ingredients that make up the crust.

    Blended dates and nuts

    2. Press crust into muffin liners

    Use about 1 tablespoon per 12 liners.

    Adding crust over liners
    Adding crust over liners

    3. Blend the filling

    Use the same food processor as you did for the crust-no need to clean it in between! We are using similar, sweet ingredients.

    Blended cheesecake filling

    4. Distribute filling over muffin liners

    Add over about 2 tablespoons per 12 liners.

    Cheesecake filling

    5. Add over toppings

    I'm all about Cheerful Choices- so feel free to use toppings of your choice. Our favorite is oreo cheesecake bites! Here are some ideas:

    • Berries
    • Chia seed jam
    • Crushed oreos
    • Chocolate chips
    • Sprinkles
    • Toasted coconut flakes
    • Granola
    No bake cheesecake bites

    5. Freeze until hardened

    Depending on your freezer, this can take 2-3 hours or more. Use your finger or gently press on the top to check if they are solid or not. Then, enjoy your no bake cheesecake bites or pop out of the freezer when you need a sweet treat.

    Tips and tricks

    • Blending: Be sure to use a food processor or high powered blender to make the crust and filling. This will ensure that everything is blended together smoothly.
    • Coconut Milk: Full fat coconut milk will have a cream that solidifies on the top. This is the part you'll want to use. If your house is hot, consider putting the canned coconut milk in the fridge for a couple hours to ensure the top cream solidifies. 
    • Serving Tips: We love enjoying these cheesecake bites as is, but they're also delish served with a dollop of whipped cream, ice cream, or a cookie on the side.
    Cheesecake cups stacked

    Customize it your way

    Like all of my other recipes, these no bake cheesecake bites are completely customizable. You get to choose what nuts, sweetener, and toppings you want to use.

    • Nuts - For the no bake cheesecake bites crust you can use any nuts you have on hand. Try almonds, walnuts, cashews, or another type.
    • Sweetener - You can use maple syrup or if you want these bites to have zero added sugar, use naturally sweet date syrup.
    • Toppings - feel free to use your favorite toppings and make oreo cheesecake bites, strawberry cheesecake bites, or another variation!
    A look at the cheesecake crust

    What to do with extra coconut milk

    Since you don't use the whole can of coconut milk for this recipe, you'll end up with extra. I will often freeze it into a mason jar or ice cube trays to use later on. You can also add into the following applications:

    • Smoothies: Blend into morning smoothies for a creamy texture and subtle tropical flavor.
    • Coffee and Tea: Add to hot beverages for a dairy-free, rich latte or chai experience.
    • Sauces and Curries: Enhance savory dishes with a touch of coconut milk for added creaminess and flavor.
    • Desserts: Create dairy-free puddings, custards, and ice creams for indulgent treats.
    • Baking: Substitute for dairy milk in baked goods like cakes and muffins.
    • Creamy Soups: Use in soups and curries for a velvety texture and taste.
    • Mocktails/Cocktails: Incorporate into beverages for a tropical and refreshing element.
    • Chia Pudding: Make creamy overnight chia pudding for a nutritious breakfast.

    Are they vegan?

    You can easily make these into vegan cheesecake bites but substituting the Greek yogurt for another ⅓ cup of coconut milk. So instead of using ⅔ cup coconut milk, you would use 1 cup in total. This is even a good option for someone who doesn't have yogurt on hand.

    Cheesecake bites on a plate

    Can you make cheesecake bites ahead of time? 

    One of the best things about these no bake cheesecake bites is that they can be made ahead of time for meal prep. Simply prepare the bites according to the recipe, store them in an airtight container, and freeze them until you are ready to enjoy them. They make a great snack or dessert that you can grab and go when you are short on time.

    How do you store these no bake mini cheesecakes?

    You can store your mini cheesecake bites in a sealable bag for up to 3 months in the freezer. When you are ready to enjoy, simply set them out at room temperature for 5-10 minutes before serving. Or if you're impatient like us, you can microwave one at a time for 10 seconds for a quick thaw option!

    Cheesecake liners in pan frozen

    Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

    In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

    Cheesecake Bites 1
    Print Recipe
    5 from 2 votes

    No Bake Cheesecake Bites

    These no bake cheesecake bites are so easy to whip up and use just one food processor for easy clean up. Choose any toppings of your choice too!
    Prep Time20 minutes mins
    Freeze Time3 hours hrs 20 minutes mins
    Total Time3 hours hrs 40 minutes mins
    Course: Sweet Treat Choices
    Cuisine: American
    Keyword: cheesecake cups, no bake cheesecake bites
    Servings: 12 mini cheesecake bites
    Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

    Equipment

    • Silicone Baking Cups
    • Pitted Medjool Dates
    • 1-Ingredient Peanut Butter
    • Maple Syrup
    • Coconut Milk
    • Cashews

    Ingredients

    Crust:

    • ½ cup raw or roasted nuts of your choice (almonds, walnuts, or cashews)
    • 8 Medjool dates, pitted (about 1 cup total)

    Cheesecake:

    • ⅔ cup full fat coconut milk - scrape the cream off the top*
    • ⅓ cup plain Greek yogurt If vegan, sub for another ⅓ cup of the coconut milk cream
    • 3 tablespoons maple syrup or date syrup
    • 2 tablespoons creamy nut butter of your choice (peanut butter, almond butter, or cashew butter)
    • 1 tablespoon lemon juice, about ½ medium lemon juiced
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla
    • ¼ teaspoon salt

    Topping:

    • ½ cup toppings of your choice (berries, chia seed jam, crushed oreos, mini chocolate chips, sprinkles, toasted coconut flakes, granola, etc.)
    instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

    Instructions

    • Line a muffin tin with 12 silicone cups or parchment liners.
    • In a food processor or blender, pulse together nuts and dates until sticky and crumbly, about 60 seconds. Divide 1 packed tablespoon mixture among 12 liners. Use the back of the tablespoon or your fingers to press into the bottom.
    • To the same food processor or blender, add in all cheesecake ingredients and blend together until smooth. (Note: this filling will be a bit thinner in consistency than a traditional cheesecake.)
    • Divide cheesecake mixture evenly over the crusts (about 2 tablespoons per cup). Place muffin tin in the freezer for 20 minutes to slightly harden the tops so the toppings won't sink down.
    • Then, divide toppings over cups. Feel free to use a single topping or a mixture of different ones.
    • Place in the freezer for another 3 hours until frozen. Remove from silicone cups or gently peel off paper liner. 
    • Storage: Store any extra cheesecakes in an airtight container in the freezer for up to 3 months. The cheesecakes will harden over time so I recommend setting them out at room temperature for 5-10 minutes before serving. Alternatively, you can microwave one at a time for 10 seconds for a quick thaw option.

    Video

    Notes

    Note on Coconut Milk: Full fat coconut milk will have a cream that solidifies on the top. This is the part you'll want to use. If your house is hot, consider putting the canned coconut milk in the fridge for a couple hours to ensure the top cream solidifies. You'll also end up with extra coconut milk-read my suggestions above on ways to use up the rest

    save this no bake cheesecake bite recipe on pinterest:

    Pinterest Mackenzie will do

    Want more easy desserts? Try these other recipes

    • Chocolate Smoothie
    • Strawberry Cookies
    • Chocolate Popcorn
    • Protein Powder Mug Cake

    15 Sustainable Food Brands

    August 16, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

    Sustainability is the future. From travel and name-brands to agriculture and food, we are seeing organizations from all sectors focused on the goal of maintaining a sustainable future. Here are a few sustainable food brands and their commitment to a greener future.

    (This post is written by Cheerful Choices contributor, Katie Erickson.)

    Sustainable food brands guide

    Disclosure: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. Thanks so much for your support! See my disclosure policy for more details.

    Table of Contents

    • Why is sustainability important?
    • Other eco labels
    • Examples of sustainable food brands
      • Pete and Gerry's Organic Eggs
      • Ben & Jerry's
      • Once Upon a Farm
      • Drizzle Honey
      • Purely Elizabeth
      • Vermont Creamery
      • Alter Eco
      • Danone
      • Quinn Snacks
    • Others we love

    Why is sustainability important?

    For the sake of the planet and all living life it holds, it is our duty to ensure a healthy environment for future generations and the plants and animals that we share this beautiful place we call home. For our species, there are a number of ways we can minimize our energy usage and reduce our carbon footprint, including our most valuable need: what we eat. 

    Check out these 13 sustainable kitchen tips too!

    Broth made from veggie scraps

    B Corp brands

    Locating foods and food brands who share this desire for our world can often be difficult. Luckily in 2006, 3 friends recognized this same vision and started a movement. B Corporation, or Benefit Corporation, is a nonprofit network transforming the global economy to benefit all people, communities, and the planet.

    Over 7,000 companies in 91 countries are a part of it. To bear the B-Certified Stamp, they undergo rigorous tests of performance, accountability, and transparency based on factors like employee benefits and charitable donations. They are tested every 3 years and pay a yearly certification fee to maintain their social and environmental impact status.

    Variety of greens

    Other eco labels

    • Fair Trade Certified - Fair Trade Certified is an award-winning sustainable sourcing model aimed at improving lives while protecting the planet. Like B-Corp Certified companies, Fair Trade Certified companies undergo rigorous testing to meet the company's standards while protecting the livelihoods of farmers, fishers, and other producers, and environmental health at the core of its focus. (explain in 1-2 sentences)
    • Certified Humane - This registered nonprofit certification organization is dedicated to improving the lives of farm animals in food production. The Certified Humane organization does this by expanding consumer awareness that drives the demand for kinder and more responsible farming practices. 
    • Food Alliance Certified - Food Alliance is another nonprofit organization that offers a whole system certification to address safe and fair working conditions, humane treatment of animals, and environmental stewardship for farmers, ranchers, and the food and beverage industries. 
    • USDA Organic - This popular certification operation connects already certified companies and those looking to become certified to programs, services, and educational materials that help organic farms and businesses. With climate change and food security at the center of this organization, USDA Organic aims to ensure climate solutions are a top priority and that access to healthy foods promote well-being in an equitable way.  
    • Marine Stewardship Council - The Marine Stewardship Council has a mission to end overfishing and ensure seafood is sustainably caught. This organization recognizes the importance of fish and seafood in maintaining food security, so look for brands with the sea green label. 

    Examples of sustainable food brands

    Here are some brands and products you may already know and love. Their sustainable practices help have a minimal impact on the environment and optimal impact on employees, customers, and business. 

    Eggs stacked on top of each other

    Pete and Gerry's Organic Eggs

    Eggs are one of the most commonly recognized nutritious foods across the globe. In fact, packed inside the shell of one large egg are 6 grams of protein and important vitamins like B12, B2, vitamin-D, and the vitamin-like compound choline. They also contain minerals such as selenium and iron, all of which play a role in bone health, immunity, cell growth, and more. 

    Pete and Gerry's was B-certified in 2013 with the mission of partnering with family-owned farms to set the new standard of farming practices and animal care. Not only B-certified, this brand also bears the stamps of Certified Humane, USDA Certified Organic, and 1% for the Planet.

    Try using eggs in recipes like one pan frittatas and homemade protein bistro boxes.

    Ben & Jerry's

    As a dietitian, I'm all about balance-and that includes satisfying a sweet tooth! Ben & Jerry's Ice Cream aims to support positive change through thoughtful ingredients, activism, and by supporting important causes they feel strongly about. 

    B-Certified since 2012, Ben & Jerry's is sure to sweeten your summer while also helping farmers, animals, and the environment thrive. 

    Ice cream scoops stacked

    Once Upon a Farm

    Finding foods your little ones enjoy is no easy feat, let alone locating those that are tasty and nutritious. Thankfully, you can look no further - certified since 2017, Once Upon a Farm uses high-pressure pasteurization that locks in the nutrients and flavors of farm-fresh ingredients into craveable, organic snacks and meals for children of all ages. With varieties like Cauliflower Fields, Oats & Roots, and Ancient Grains & Greens, all fruit and veggie blends are organic, non-GMO, and contain no added sugar, preservatives, or other additives.

    Once Upon a Farm strives to be a purpose-led company that uses quality standards to test their ingredients for 400+ environmental and industrial toxins, including heavy metals. You can find this brand at a number of retail stores oreven build your own subscription online.

    Drizzle Honey

    Drizzle Honey was B-Certified in 2019 and is also a Certified Women-Owned and Operated company. They aim to provide safe habitats for bees to build their homes. The northern wildflower fields of Alberta offer bees access to a variety of pollen and nectar-rich food sources-including the clover that Drizzle Honey is known for.

    Drizzle Honey also donates to pollinator research and educates its customers on the importance of pollinators. They continue to partner with local beekeepers to maintain control of the quality and safety of their honey while reducing their carbon footprint.

    They have fun flavors like Cinnamon Spiced, Cacao Luxe, Turmeric Gold, and Berry Bliss! Try drizzling honey over sheet pan pancakes or blend into a smoothie bowl.

    Purely Elizabeth

    Just like Hippocrates felt that food is thy medicine and medicine is thy food, Purely Elizabeth believes that food can heal, and when you eat better, you feel better. That's why Elizabeth Stein set out 15 years ago and created delicious and wholesome products that don't sacrifice between nutritious ingredients and culinary taste. From her array of granolas and oatmeals to her cereals and cookbooks, Purely Elizabeth uses sustainability to thrive. 

    B-Certified in 2015, Purely Elizabeth understands we cannot continue to ignore the impact that scaling food products has on the health of the planet. To make this impact a positive one, the family at Purely Elizabeth supports farmers that are transitioning from traditional farming to regenerative agriculture practices. These methods work to restore soil health and broken ecosystems to help replenish the earth. You can find Purely Elizabeth products online  or in your local grocery store.

    Handful of soil

    Vermont Creamery

    There's nothing like a good cheese spread. Always ready for a summer picnic, football Sunday get together, or a BBQ at the neighbor's house. Cheese not only ignites the taste buds, it also brings people together. Specializing in fresh goat cheese, aged cheese, culinary creams, and cultured butter, Vermont Creamery has been crafting these outstanding products for over 35 years.

    B-Certified in 2014, Vermont Creamery has worked on perfecting every single detail of what they make. They also believe in their mission to spend energy on ensuring their business makes a positive impact on their employees, customers, farmers, communities, and their friends. They have a variety of fun goat cheese flavors like Wild Blueberry, Lemon & Thyme, Strawberry Spritz, and Chocolate & Cherry. They also haveaged cheeses like St. Albans and Coupole. Try adding their cheeses to a themed board like a valentine's charcuterie board or a fall charcuterie board.

    Alter Eco

    Mhmm, chocolate! The treat that accompanies every mood and occasion. Alter Eco is a chocolate-centric food company that cultivates their product through regenerative agriculture and carbon sequestration. oth of these practices aim to reverse climate change and manage air carbon dioxide concentrations by capturing excess carbon dioxide from the air and storing it in healthy soil.. 

    Alter Eco was B-Certified in 2009 and understands how climate change impacts all life on Earth. The company's mission is to offset disproportionately affected marginalized communities, who are threatened with food insecurity, a lack of a clean water supply, biodiversity, and so much more. Alter Eco uses the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC) reports-a 1988 established intergovernmental body of the United Nations who advances scientific knowledge on climate change-to guide them on their business practices. 

    From Chocolate Nut Butter Bombs to Raspberry Blackout chocolate bars, -all products are Certified Organic and readily available at stores and online.

    Chocolate bars on top of each other

    Danone

    When you think of yogurt, you might also think of Danone, the maker of some of our favorite brands like Activa, Oikos, Silk, Evian, and Horizon Organic. Danone is established in countries all over the world including Canada, the United States, the United Kingdom, and Ireland, and B-Certified in each of them as well.In North America, Danone was B-Certified in 2018. 

    Danone puts high expectations on their products and expresses a mission of repairing the global food system with a more sustainable path moving forward. They believe this requires joining other like-minded companies to work towards social and environmental good for all. 

    Quinn Snacks

    Quinn creates environmentally conscious and transparently sourced snack foods, such as popcorn and pretzels. They recently became certified as a B Corporation in 2023. This certification reflects Quinn's longstanding commitment to sustainable agriculture, ingredient transparency, and the elimination of synthetics and chemicals from the food system, aligning with their efforts to positively impact workers, customers, communities, and the environment.

    Others we love

    Here are a few others we applaud for their dedication to sustainability. While they may not possess a B-Certification, they remain steadfast in their commitment to sustainable practices.

    • Clif Bar - energy-sustaining bars
    • Aquaculture Stewardship Council (ASC) - sustainably produced seafood
    • NOW Foods - powders and supplements
    • Maple Hill Creamery - grass-fed milk, yogurt, and kefir
    • Teton Waters Ranch - grass-fed and certified humane beef
    • Lotus Sustainables - reusable produce and tote bags for shopping
    • Richards Rainwater - clean caught water from the sky
    • Mushroom Council - mushrooms require very little land, water, or energy to grow
    • Pacific Coast Producers - canned foods with aluminum cans that are forever recyclable

    Have thoughts on other sustainable brands you think should be featured in this guide? Use the contact form to let us know!

    Final Thoughts

    With dozens of other food brands, as well as thousands of other varying sustainable products, check out who else is B-Certified here. From mattresses and shoes, to clothing and food, you're sure to find brands you're excited to try or those you already buy. 

    It's exciting when you discover products all over your home you already support. You'll feel like you belong to a community fighting for a common goal. And don't forget about those other sustainable certification organizations mentioned earlier. They too have designed a set of standards companies can follow to honor their commitment to sustainability for all. Sustainability for people, business, and most importantly… the little blue planet we all call home.

    share this sustainable brand guide on pinterest:

    Sustainable food brands
    FullSizeRender

    About the guest contributor: Katie is a recent graduate from Colorado State University with a degree in Food Science & Human Nutrition and a passion for food systems and environmental sustainability. Considering continuing her education in a Master's of Public Health, Katie is driven and inspired to help transition the food system into a more sustainable, accessible market. In her spare time, she can be found hiking or camping in the mountains, spending time with her loved ones and Boxer Charley, and researching current food policy and changes to the food system.

    Customizable Bistro Protein Box

    August 14, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 8 Comments

    This Bistro Protein Box recipe template is the perfect lunch or snack to meal prep ahead of time. These bistro boxes are ideal to pack for back to school or bring to work. Plus, you get to customize with a mix of your favorite proteins, energizing carbohydrates, crunchy veggies, and a tasty dip.

    Bento boxes with protein, carbs, and veggies

    Disclosure: This post has been sponsored by The American Egg Board. All opinions are my own; I never feature a brand that I don't love!

    Table of Contents

    • What is a bistro box?
    • How do you make a bistro protein box?
      • 1. Start with eggs
      • 2. Add extra proteins
      • 3. Add carbs
      • 4. Add veggies
      • 5. Don't forget the dip
    • Recipe tips and tricks
    • Can I make this box ahead of time?
    • How do I store these protein boxes?
      • save this bento box recipe on pinterest:
      • Want more? Try these other meal prep recipes
    • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

    What is a bistro box?

    A bistro box is a box broken up into compartments/sections and filled with a balance of protein, carbs, veggies, and dip choices. It's also commonly called a "protein box" or "bento box. Crafting your own protein boxes at home is an easy way to save on time and cost.

    Simply mix and match various ingredients to suit your taste buds and dietary preferences. Plus, you can skip the grocery run and use up any bits of food you already have on hand!

    Mix and match these bistro protein boxes

    Are eggs healthy?

    A staple I always add to my bistro boxes is hard boiled eggs. This small but mighty ingredient is a nutrient powerhouse. One large egg packs in 6 grams of complete protein alongside essential vitamins and minerals for healthy living. Here are some benefits of eggs to keep in mind.

    Eggs for brain health

    The choline in eggs helps support lifelong brain health at every age and stage, including memory, thinking, mood and more. Choline isn't found in high quantities in many foods. Luckily, eggs are one of the most concentrated food sources of choline in the American diet.

    Choline is critical to good health and remains essential throughout the lifespan. Getting enough choline is especially important for pregnancy and early childhood development. In fact, recent studies have found maternal choline intake during the second and third trimesters can improve measures of cognitive function in infants and can have long term benefits on brain development and health.

    Carton of eggs with hard boiled eggs next to it

    Eggs for muscle recovery

    Eggs are considered a complete protein, meaning they contain all 9 essential amino acids (aka building blocks of proteins). Enjoying high-quality protein, like eggs, in combination with carbohydrates post-workout can help refuel our muscles and optimize recovery.

    The protein and good-for-you fat found in eggs can also help you feel fuller longer, making them a perfect choice for sustained energy throughout the day. Try meal prep breakfast burritos, veggie loaded egg muffins, or a savory potato hash for breakfast.

    Eggs fit into a heart-healthy diet

    Science is in alliance: Heart-healthy eating can include eggs, as supported by an abundance of research including a recent Harvard study evaluating up to 32 years of data.

    In fact, according to the American Heart Association, healthy people can include an average of seven eggs per week as part of a heart-healthy diet. Older adults with normal cholesterol and vegetarians can include more in the context of moderation.

    Empty bento box
    Protein in bento box
    Carbs in bento box
    Veggies in bento box

    How do you make a bistro protein box?

    Let's talk about how to assemble your completely customizable bistro protein box.

    1. Start with eggs

    These nutritional powerhouses are a great way to start your bistro box. You could meal prep hard-boiled eggs or try air fryer egg muffin bites (bonus points for adding veggies!).

    Hard boiled eggs on grey background

    2. Add extra proteins

    Along with the hard boiled egg, I recommend adding over 1 to 2 ounces (or about 2 to 4 tablespoons) of additional protein foods. 

    Here are some protein choices to try:

    • Nuts (almonds, walnuts, cashews, pistachios, etc.)
    • Nut Butter
    • Sliced Turkey or Chicken
    • Roasted Chickpeas
    • Edamame

    3. Add carbs

    Carbohydrates are the body's primary source of energy. Try to mainly choose ones filled with lots of vitamins, minerals, and fiber. 

    Here's some examples:

    • Fruit (strawberries, grapes, blueberries, sliced apples, orange segments, watermelon chunks, etc.)
    • Sliced Baguettes
    • Energy Bites
    • Pita Chips
    • Whole Grain Crackers
    • Rice Cakes
    Protein meal prep boxes

    4. Add veggies

    The goal is to get at least 3 servings of vegetables/day. This box includes ~1 serving of vegetables, helping you work towards this goal.

    Try these colorful veggie options:

    • Bell Peppers
    • Sliced Cucumber
    • Cherry Tomatoes
    • Carrot Chips
    • Snap Peas
    • Broccoli Florets
    • Celery Sticks
    • Cauliflower Florets
    • Zucchini Sticks
    • Feel free to add a variety of multiple different veggies too!

    5. Don't forget the dip

    I find plain veggies can get somewhat bland, so I recommend serving with a dip on the side.

    Here are some ones I love:

    • Hummus
    • Guacamole
    • Queso
    • Salsa
    • Black Bean Dip
    • Cottage Cheese
    • Greek Yogurt Ranch Dip
    • Peanut Sauce
    • Baba Ganoush
    • Pesto
    • Tzatziki
    Snack box with protein, fruits, and veggies

    Recipe tips and tricks

    • Serving Tips: For an even more satisfying meal, you can pair your bistro box with a side salad or soup.
    • Troubleshooting Tips: If you find your veggies are getting a bit soggy after a few days, try placing a piece of paper towel at the bottom of the container to absorb excess moisture.
    • Scaling Tips: Making bistro boxes for a group, your kids, or multiple days? Simply repeat the instructions to make as many bistro boxes as you need.

    Can I make this box ahead of time?

    Absolutely! These snack boxes are ideal for meal prep. Add all the ingredients to the meal prep container sections and store in the fridge. These will save you time during busy weekdays and ensure you have a nutritious meal or snack box ready to go.

    Meal prep snack box in the fridge

    How do I store these protein boxes?

    Add an airtight lid over your protein boxes and store in the fridge for up to 5 days. Perfect to enjoy all week long! See this recipe in action on my Instagram video!

    Bistro boxes
    Bistro boxes stacked

    Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

    In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

    Bistro Boxes 2
    Print Recipe
    5 from 5 votes

    Bistro Protein Box

    This Bistro Protein Box recipe template is the perfect lunch or snack to meal prep ahead of time. Plus, you get to customize with a mix of your favorite proteins, energizing carbohydrates, crunchy veggies, and a tasty dip.
    Prep Time10 minutes mins
    Total Time10 minutes mins
    Course: Main Dish Choices
    Keyword: bento box, bistro box, protein box, starbucks box
    Servings: 1 bistro box
    Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

    Equipment

    • Glass Bistro Box Container
    • Plastic Bistro Box Container

    Ingredients

    • 1 to 2 hard boiled eggs
    • 1 to 2 ounces protein of your choice (nuts, nut butter, sliced turkey or chicken, roasted chickpeas, edamame, etc.)
    • 1 cup carbohydrate of your choice (fruit, sliced baguettes, energy bites, pita chips, whole grain crackers, rice cakes, etc.*)
    • 1 cup vegetables of your choice (bell peppers, sliced cucumber, cherry tomatoes, carrot chips, snap peas, broccoli florets, zucchini sticks, etc. Feel free to do a variety too!)
    • 1 to 2 ounces dip of your choice (single serve hummus, guacamole, queso, salsa, black bean dip, cottage cheese, greek yogurt ranch dip, peanut sauce, baba ganoush, pesto, tzatziki, etc.)
    instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

    Instructions

    • Protein
      Start by adding the hard boiled egg and protein choice to the top compartment of the bistro box. 
    • Carbohydrates
      Next, fill the bottom left compartment with your carbohydrate choice. 
    • Vegetables
      Then, in the bottom right compartment, place your vegetable choice. 
    • Dip
      Don't forget the dip! Add your dip choice to a separate single-serve container to have alongside your bistro box (or purchase single serve packs).
    • Feel free to repeat the same process for as many boxes as you'd like.
    • Store prepped bistro protein boxes in the fridge for up to 5 days until ready to eat.

    Video

    Notes

    Note on Amounts: The amount of ingredients you add to the bistro box will vary depending on your calories needs. If this is for a child or to have as a snack, you may consider adding less. If this is for an adult or to have as a meal, you may consider adding more.
    *Carbs Note: If you are adding crackers to the carbohydrate section, I’d recommend putting them in a separate resealable bag to put either inside of the box or on the side of the box. This will help prevent them from getting soggy or stale.

    save this bento box recipe on pinterest:

    Customizable Protein Bistro Boxes for back to school

    Want more? Try these other meal prep recipes

    • Customizable Power Bowl
    • Veggie Egg Pasta Salad with Chickpeas
    • Salted Caramel Protein Bites (shown in pictures)

    Vegan Tofu Tacos

    July 19, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 6 Comments

    This vegan-friendly tofu tacos recipe is perfect to make for meatless monday without sacrificing on taste or protein content. It contains crumbled tofu marinated in flavorful spices with customizable toppings of your choice! Options to either air fry or bake the tofu.

    Picking up corn tortilla with crumbled tofu filling

    Disclosure: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. Thanks so much for your support! See my disclosure policy for more details.

    Table of Contents

    • Why you'll love it
    • Ingredients You'll Need
    • How do you press tofu?
    • How do you make tofu tacos?
    • Should I make air fried tofu or baked tofu?
    • Recipe tips and tricks
    • Customize it your way
    • Can I make these tofu tacos ahead of time?
    • How do I store leftover crumbled tofu?
    • Want more tofu recipes? Try these high protein options:

    Why you'll love it

    These tofu tacos are a tasty and satisfying alternative to traditional meat tacos. The crumbled tofu absorbs the Mexican-inspired marinade, resulting in a savory and flavorful filling similar to ground meat. Plus, these tacos are incredibly versatile, allowing you to use whatever toppings you like best. This is even a great option for parties where you can create a "taco bar" with all the various toppings for guests to choose from.

    Whether you're a vegan, vegetarian, or simply looking to incorporate more plant-based meals into your diet, these tofu tacos are a fantastic choice.

    3 tacos on a plate with cilantro sprinkled over

    Is tofu healthy?

    Tofu is the star ingredient of these tacos. It's an excellent source of plant-based protein with 8 grams of protein per 3 ounce serving. It's also packed with essential amino acids (protein build blocks) and minerals like iron, calcium, and magnesium. 

    Tofu Tacos Process

    Ingredients You'll Need

    • Firm or extra firm tofu - This versatile soy-based protein is widely available in grocery stores and can be found in the refrigerated section next to other plant-based products and dairy alternatives.
    • Low sodium soy sauce - Opting for low sodium soy sauce helps to reduce sodium intake without compromising flavor. If you are gluten-free, use tamari in place of soy sauce.
    • Nutritional yeast - This plant-based ingredient is made from deactivated yeast. Sounds weird, right? It's actually packed with nutrients such as vitamin B12 which is often lacking in a vegan diet. Nutritional yeast adds a cheesy, nutty flavor to the tofu.
    • White onion and bell pepper - These vegetables add texture and freshness to the tacos. Try picking them up at a local farmers market if you have access to one!
    • Oil of your choice - Use a high-quality oil like olive oil or avocado oil to sauté the onions and bell peppers.
    • Corn tortillas - Corn tortillas are naturally gluten-free and have a great flavor to compliment the tofu. You could also use flour tortillas if you prefer.

    How do you press tofu?

    For this recipe, we recommend pressing the tofu before crumbling to achieve a crispier texture. You can even cut your tofu in half before pressing it to make it more efficient.

    You can press the tofu by hand, by using a heavy object, or with a press made for tofu. Read my guide for full instructions on each of these methods!

    Tofu 2

    How do you make tofu tacos?

    Making this recipe is a breeze! Simply combine all ingredients in a bowl and bake or air fry until crispy. You can even make the mixture ahead of time and let "marinate" overnight.

    Tofu Tacos Process 1

    Should I make air fried tofu or baked tofu?

    Ultimately, this decision boils down to your personal preference and kitchen equipment. 

    Air fried tofu: If you're looking for a quicker cooking time and crave that crispy texture, air frying is the way to go. Air frying uses hot, circulating air to cook the tofu, resulting in a deliciously crispy exterior without the need for excessive oil. I use my air fryer in the summertime to avoid heating up the house with the oven.

    Baked tofu: If you prefer a slightly more tender texture and don't have an air fryer, baked tofu is a fantastic choice. Baking allows the tofu to retain more moisture, making it softer on the inside while still developing a delightful chewiness. Plus, it's a super simple method that just requires a large sheet pan.

    Tofu Tacos Process 2
    Tofu Tacos Process 3

    Recipe tips and tricks

    • Serving Tips: While the tofu is cooking, it's the perfect time to make a side dish. These tofu tacos pair well with a variety of dishes such as Mexican rice, black beans, or a refreshing salad. As for drink options, a glass of freshly squeezed lemonade or a fruity mocktail can complement the flavors of the tacos perfectly.
    • Troubleshooting Tips: If the tofu seems too moist after baking, try baking for a few more minutes. Everyone's oven is different!
    • Scaling Tips: Feel free to double or triple the recipe to accommodate larger gatherings or for meal prepping. Simply adjust the quantities of the ingredients accordingly, and make sure to use multiple large baking sheets or do multiple batches in the air fryer.
    3 tacos on holder

    Customize it your way

    Like all of my other recipes, these tofu tacos are completely customizable. You get to choose what toppings and fillings you want to use. These tacos are vegan friendly but you can add on non-vegan toppings if you'd like. 

    Here are some ideas to suit different dietary preferences:

    • Diced avocado/guacamole: Creamy avocado adds a rich and buttery texture to the tacos.
    • Diced tomatoes/salsa: Fresh tomatoes or salsa provide a burst of acidity and brightness.
    • Fresh chopped cilantro: Sprinkle some fresh cilantro for a vibrant herbal note.
    • Sour cream or plain Greek yogurt: For those seeking a tangy protein boost, plain Greek yogurt is a fantastic addition to these tofu tacos.
    • Lime slices: Squeeze some fresh lime juice over the tacos for a refreshing citrus twist.
    • Black beans: If you want even more protein than the tofu provides, feel free to sprinkle over black beans.
    • Pickled red onions: Add bright, zesty flavor. Grab our recipe for quick pickled red onions!
    Tofu tacos before toppings
    Tofu Tacos 7

    Can I make these tofu tacos ahead of time?

    Yes, you can! These tofu tacos are an excellent option for meal prep or making ahead of time. Prepare the tofu filling as instructed and store it separately from the tortillas and toppings. When ready to serve, simply reheat the tofu filling on the stovetop or in the microwave, warm up the tortillas, and assemble the tacos with your desired toppings.

    You can even use the crumbled and cooked tofu to other dishes like salad, wraps, power bowls, or make ahead burritos.

    How do I store leftover crumbled tofu?

    Store leftover tofu in an airtight container for up to 4 days in the fridge. To reheat, you can either warm up the tofu filling on the stovetop or in the microwave. The tortillas and toppings are best when assembled fresh, so consider storing them separately and assembling just before serving.

    Tofu tacos recipe

    Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

    In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

    Tofu Tacos 7
    Print Recipe
    5 from 9 votes

    Tofu Tacos

    This tofu tacos recipe contains crispy, flavorful tofu crumbles served with customizable toppings! Options to either air fry or bake the tofu too.
    Prep Time10 minutes mins
    Cook Time20 minutes mins
    Total Time30 minutes mins
    Course: Main Dish Choices
    Cuisine: Mexican
    Keyword: tofu tacos
    Servings: 4 servings (2 tacos per person)
    Calories: 270kcal
    Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

    Ingredients

    Tofu Ingredients:

    • 1 - 14 ounce block firm or extra firm tofu, drained and pressed*
    • 2 tablespoons low sodium soy sauce, or tamari if gluten-free
    • 1 tablespoon nutritional yeast
    • 2 teaspoons ground cumin
    • 2 teaspoons chili powder
    • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
    • ½ teaspoon onion powder
    • ½ teaspoon paprika
    • ½ cup white onion, diced (about ½ small onion)
    • 1 small bell pepper of your choice, diced (red, orange, yellow)
    • 1 tablespoon oil of your choice (olive oil, avocado oil, etc.)
    • 8 corn tortillas

    Toppings of your choice:

    • Diced avocado/guacamole
    • Diced tomatoes/salsa
    • Fresh chopped cilantro
    • Sour cream, vegan sour cream, or plain Greek yogurt
    • Lime slices, for squeezing over
    instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

    Instructions

    • Preheat your oven or air fryer to 400°F.
    • In a large bowl, crumble the pressed tofu into small pieces the size of a dime using your hands or a fork.
    • To the same bowl, add over soy sauce, nutritional yeast, ground cumin, chili powder, garlic powder, onion powder, paprika, diced onion, diced pepper, and oil and mix to combine. You can cook this mixture right away or let marinate for up to 24 hours in the fridge.
    • Oven instructions: Spread the tofu mixture evenly on a large baking sheet lined with parchment paper. Bake for 25-30 minutes, or until the tofu is slightly browned. Be sure to rotate the pan and stir halfway through. Remove the pan from the oven and let the tofu rest for 5 minutes to firm up before serving. 
    • Air fryer instructions: Spread the marinated tofu evenly on a large air fryer basket lined with parchment paper or sprayed with cooking oil. Bake for 10-12 minutes, or until the tofu is slightly browned. Be sure to remove the tofu and toss around halfway through cooking. Let tofu rest in the air fryer basket for 5 minutes to firm up before serving. 
    • Warm up corn tortillas by placing them on a pan (with no oil) over medium heat for 1-2 minutes per side or microwave tortillas in a slightly damp paper towel for 20 seconds.
    • To assemble tacos, spoon about ¼ cup crumbled tofu mixture onto the tortillas and add over any desired toppings.

    Notes

    *Note on pressing: You can press the tofu by hand, by using a heavy object, or with a press made for tofu. Read my guide HERE for full instructions on each of these methods!

    Nutrition

    Serving: 2tacos | Calories: 270kcal | Carbohydrates: 32g | Protein: 15g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 300mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 3g

    save this crispy tofu tacos recipe on pinterest:

    Tofu tacos to save on pinterest

    Want more tofu recipes? Try these high protein options:

    • Tofu Scramble for Breakfast
    • Tofu Thai Peanut Bowl for Lunch
    • "Orange" Tofu for Dinner
    • Chocolate Tofu Mousse for Dessert

    Watermelon Mocktail

    July 13, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 2 Comments

    This Watermelon Mocktail recipe is perfect for those scorching summer days when you need a refreshing drink to cool down. It contains juicy watermelon, zesty limes, and hydrating coconut water. Plus, you get to customize it with your choice of sparkling water and sweetener. Read on to learn about the benefits of watermelon as well as tips and tricks for making this mocktail.

    Refreshing watermelon mocktail on white backdrop

    Disclosure: This post has been sponsored by the National Watermelon Promotion Board. All opinions are my own; I never feature a brand that I don't love! This post may also contain affiliate links. See my disclosure policy for more details.

    Table of Contents

    • Why You'll Love It:
    • Is watermelon healthy?
      • Hydrating 
      • Vitamins and minerals
      • A slice of happy
    • Can watermelon be frozen?
      • How to freeze watermelon:
      • Frozen watermelon recipes
    • How do you make these watermelon mocktails?
      • 1. Gather everything you need 
      • 2. Blend together your ingredients
      • 3. Strain out the mixture
      • 4. Assembly the final drink
    • Recipe tips and tricks
    • Customize it your way
    • Making this watermelon mocktail recipe ahead of time
    • Can I store leftovers?
      • save this watermelon mocktail recipe on pinterest:
      • Want more watermelon? Try these other recipes:
    • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

    Why You'll Love It:

    This Watermelon Mocktail is the perfect way to savor the taste of summer. Its vibrant color and easy prep makes it a fantastic choice for outdoor parties and weekend brunch. Here's why you'll love making this refresher.

    • Hydrating: Watermelon and coconut water team up to provide hydration that your body craves, especially during those scorching days.
    • Easy to Make: With just a few simple steps, you'll have this mocktail ready to sip in no time. 
    • Healthy: This watermelon drink uses simple, high quality ingredients that are good for our health. Mocktails also offer a satisfying and enjoyable experience without the alcohol.
    Halved watermelon
    Scooping watermelon with melon baller

    Is watermelon healthy?

    As a dietitian, I absolutely love watermelon and the nutrients it has. You can eat the whole watermelon, including the rind. The rind can be added to all kinds of recipes including sauces, kimchi, and more. Just be sure to thoroughly wash your watermelon with water before cutting. 

    Although watermelon is commonly enjoyed during the summer, it's available year-round. To pick the best watermelon, look for one free of damages and one with a yellow spot on the bottom. This creamy spot indicates that it was on the ground for enough time to properly ripen before it was picked. A perfectly ripe watermelon will be bursting with a juicy, sweet flavor.

    Mocktails garnished with fresh mint
    Grabbing mocktail from table

    Here's a few health benefits that watermelon provides.

    Hydrating 

    Watermelon is 92% water, making it an excellent food to contribute to overall hydration. Hydration is essential for many functions including digestion, metabolism, and our body's temperature regulation. This watermelon mocktail can help promote even more hydration too! 

    Vitamins and minerals

    Watermelon is a nutrient-dense fruit brimming with benefits. Each slice delivers powerful phytonutrients, satiating fiber, and vitamins and minerals. 

    In fact, just two cups of watermelon has 80 calories alongside vitamins A (8% DV), B1 (8% DV),  B6 (5% DV), and C (25% DV), and the minerals potassium (6% DV), magnesium (6% DV), and phosphorus (2% DV). All of these nutrients help to support our health and wellness in different ways (read more about it here)!

    A slice of happy

    According to new research from the National Watermelon Promotion Board, 82% of watermelon purchasers say eating watermelon boosts their mood! They also found that 100% of respondents said watermelon makes them feel either very happy (70%) or somewhat happy (30%). 

    Four glasses of watermelon mocktails surrounded by watermelon slices

    Can watermelon be frozen?

    Watermelon can be frozen in various different forms such as melon balled, cubed, or blended. This is a great option, especially if you have extra watermelon you can't eat right away.

    I love freezing watermelon balls to add to this mocktail and provide a refreshing icy element to the drink.

    How to freeze watermelon:

    1. Start by cutting the fresh watermelon into small, bite-sized cubes or use a melon baller to create watermelon balls.
    2. Lay the watermelon pieces in a single layer on a baking sheet lined with parchment paper.
    3. Place the baking sheet in the freezer and let the watermelon freeze for a few hours or until completely solid.
    4. Once frozen, transfer the watermelon balls into a resealable freezer bag or an airtight container for future use. Be sure to label and date it.
    5. By freezing watermelon in advance, you'll have a stash of ready-to-use frozen watermelon balls whenever you want to whip up this Watermelon Mocktail. These frozen watermelon balls not only keep the drink chilled but also provide a fun texture and extra burst of flavor.
    Frozen watermelon balls

    Frozen watermelon recipes

    You can also enjoy frozen watermelon blended into numerous different recipes. Here's some fun ones to try:

    • Watermelon Daiquiri
    • Watermelon Mojito Sorbet
    • Watermelon Kiwi Smoothie

    How do you make these watermelon mocktails?

    You can whip these refreshing watermelon drinks together in no time. Here's how to make them:

    Ingredients needed including coconut water, lime, and mint

    1. Gather everything you need 

    This recipe only calls for a few key ingredients but they're all key in creating the best drink experience.

    Watermelon and lime in blender
    Watermelon and lime in blender
    Blended mocktail mixture

    2. Blend together your ingredients

    You'll start by blending together fresh watermelon, whole limes, coconut water, and sweetener. Be sure to use refrigerated or room temperature watermelon for this step, not frozen.

    Straining out watermelon mixture
    Strained watermelon refresher

    3. Strain out the mixture

    Through the blending process, you'll end up with some extra pulp. You could definitely go without straining it, but I prefer straining for the best mocktail texture. 

    Adding fresh mint over watermelon drinks

    4. Assembly the final drink

    After you have the strained mixture, you'll just pour it over frozen watermelon balls, top with sparkling water, and garnish.

    Recipe tips and tricks

    • Serving Tips: I love to pair this Watermelon Mocktail with a light summer salad or grilled seafood for a refreshing and balanced meal.
    • Sweetness: If your watermelon mixture is too tart for your liking, add a bit extra sweetener to balance it out.
    • Scaling: To serve a larger crowd, simply double or triple the recipe. You can also keep the watermelon mixture in the pitcher, add over the sparkling water, and have people serve themselves from the pitcher.
    Pitcher of watermelon mocktail

    Customize it your way

    Like all of my other recipes, this Watermelon Mocktail is completely customizable. You get to choose certain ingredients you want to use. Here are a few ideas:

    • Sweetener of your choice - I prefer to use ½ teaspoon liquid stevia (~40 drops) but you could also use about 2 or so tablespoons monk fruit or white sugar. You could even experiment with using other sweetener options like agave or honey. Use whatever you prefer and have on hand!
    • Sparkling water of your choice - There are hundreds of different bubbly waters on the market nowadays. Choose your favorite flavor that includes zero added sugar. Bonus points for using a watermelon flavored sparkling water!

    Making this watermelon mocktail recipe ahead of time

    While this mocktail is best enjoyed immediately after preparation, you can make the blended watermelon mixture ahead of time and store it in the refrigerator for up to 24 hours. Then, assemble the drink by adding the frozen watermelon balls to glasses, pouring over the watermelon mixture and sparkling water, and garnishing.

    Can you freeze watermelon? Yes!
    Pouring mixture over glass

    Can I store leftovers?

    Store any leftovers of this watermelon cooler in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 24 hours. For longer storage, you can freeze the watermelon mixture in ice cube trays and use them as flavor-packed additions to future mocktails.

    Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

    In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

    Watermelon Mocktails square
    Print Recipe
    5 from 3 votes

    Watermelon Mocktail

    This hydrating Watermelon Mocktail contains juicy watermelon, zesty limes, and coconut water. Top it off with your choice of sparkling water before garnishing with fresh mint.
    Prep Time10 minutes mins
    Total Time10 minutes mins
    Course: Drink Choices
    Cuisine: American
    Keyword: watermelon mocktail
    Servings: 4 drinks
    Calories: 70kcal
    Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

    Ingredients

    • 4 cups fresh watermelon, cubed or melon balled
    • 2 small limes, ends removed
    • 1 cup 8 ounces unsweetened coconut water
    • Sweetener of your choice, added to taste (I prefer to use ~½ teaspoon liquid stevia but you could also use ~2 tablespoons monk fruit or white sugar)*
    • 2 cups frozen watermelon balls, about 5 balls per glass
    • 2 cups sparkling water of your choice (plain or your favorite flavor)
    • Ice cubes, optional
    • Fresh mint leaves, optional
    instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

    Instructions

    • In a blender, combine watermelon, whole limes**, coconut water, and sweetener. Blend for just 10-15 seconds until pureed.
    • Strain the watermelon mixture over a pitcher through a fine-mesh sieve to remove any pulp or seeds. Use the back of a spoon to gently press down on the pulp to help speed up the straining process. 
    • Place frozen watermelon balls into 4 tall individual glasses. (If you don't have any ready to go, feel free to just use ice cubes.)
    • Evenly distribute the strained watermelon mixture between the 4 glasses.
    • Add about ½ cup of sparkling water to each glass to top it off with some bubbles.
    • If desired, add a few ice cubes to each glass to keep the drink chilled for longer and garnish with fresh mint leaves on top.
    • This watermelon mocktail is best if enjoyed right away but can be stored in the fridge and enjoyed for up to 24 hours too.

    Video

    Notes

    *Sweetness: This drink leans towards the less sweet/more tart side, but feel free to add more sugar to taste if you like your mocktails more sweet!
    **Whole limes: For this recipe, we are using the whole lime, skin and all. This gives it a super fresh, tart taste. However, if you prefer your drink with less of the lime flavor, you can just use the juice from 2 small limes and discard the skin.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1drink | Calories: 70kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 2g | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 11g

    save this watermelon mocktail recipe on pinterest:

    Grabbing watermelon mocktails

    Want more watermelon? Try these other recipes:

    • Watermelon Caprese Salad
    • Watermelon Rind Orzo Salad
    • Watermelon "Cupcakes"

    Chocolate Smoothie

    July 7, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 2 Comments

    This chocolate smoothie recipe is perfect for those who want to enjoy a satisfying breakfast while sneaking some greens in. It contains a delicious blend of nutrient-packed ingredients like leafy greens, cocoa powder, and Medjool dates. There are plenty of options for customizing this smoothie to your liking too.

    Chocolate smoothie with kale and blueberries in the background

    Disclosure: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. Thanks so much for your support! See my disclosure policy for more details.

    Table of Contents

    • Why you'll love this chocolate smoothie
    • Tips and tricks
    • Customize it your way
    • Can I make this smoothie ahead of time?
      • save this chocolate smoothie recipe on pinterest:
    • Craving a smoothie bowl instead?
    • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

    Why you'll love this chocolate smoothie

    This chocolate smoothie is a dream come true for all the chocolate lovers out there. It combines the rich and indulgent flavor of cocoa powder and dark chocolate chips with a hint of sweetness from ripe bananas and dates. The creamy texture, courtesy of yogurt and milk, makes it a velvety delight to sip on. Plus, it's packed with nutritious additions like kale or spinach-but you'd never know! 

    Holding out chocolate smoothie glass

    Is this chocolate smoothie healthy?

    Yes, this chocolate smoothie is filled with simple, whole food ingredients.

    • Cocoa Powder - give our smoothie the chocolatey goodness while also providing antioxidants. Research suggests that cocoa powder may help lower blood pressure and improve heart health. 
    • Kale or Spinach - packed with vitamins and minerals like vitamin A, vitamin C, vitamin K, folate, and potassium.
    • Blueberries and Medjool dates- deliciously sweet and a good source of fiber and vitamin C.

    All of these ingredients provide flavor and sweetness so you can satisfy your chocolate cravings while nourishing your body.

    Tips and tricks

    • Serving Tips: This chocolate smoothie pairs well with a variety of side dishes such as a slice of whole grain toast, a handful of nuts, or a small serving of Greek yogurt. For an extra treat, try serving it with a dollop of whipped cream or a sprinkle of coconut flakes. 
    • Troubleshooting Tips: If your smoothie turns out too thick, simply add a splash of milk and blend again. On the other hand, if it's too thin, add a few ice cubes and blend until desired consistency is reached.
    • Scaling Tips: Need to make more servings than one? No problem! Simply double or triple the ingredients while keeping the ratios the same. Adjust the blending time accordingly to ensure a smooth texture.
    Chocolate smoothie with bamboo straw

    Customize it your way

    Like all of my other recipes, this chocolate smoothie is completely customizable. You get to choose what greens, yogurt, and milk you want to use. Here are some options to suit different dietary preferences:

    • Leafy Greens: Feel free to use either kale or spinach. I love grabbing these at my local farmers market! If you end up with extra that are about to go bad, simply throw in a zip top reusable bag and freeze.
    • Yogurt: You can use a plain yogurt or a fun flavored one. If you're vegan, you can simply use a dairy-free yogurt instead.
    • Milk: Use regular dairy or opt for plant-based milk alternatives.
    • Other Add-Ins to Consider: Feel free to blend in other smoothie nutrient-boosters like nut butters, protein powder, or seeds.

    Can I make this smoothie ahead of time?

    While this chocolate smoothie is best enjoyed pretty soon after blending, you can prepare the ingredients ahead of time. Simply slice and freeze the banana, wash and store the kale, wash the blueberries, and pre-pit the dates. When you're ready to indulge, just toss the prepped ingredients into the blender, add the remaining components, and blend until smooth.

    Chocolate smoothie with bamboo straw with kale and blueberries in the background

    Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

    In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

    Chocolate Smoothie 2
    Print Recipe
    5 from 2 votes

    Chocolate Smoothie

    This chocolate smoothie recipe is perfect for those who want to enjoy a satisfying breakfast while sneaking some greens in. It contains a delicious blend of nutrient-packed ingredients like leafy greens, cocoa powder, and Medjool dates
    Prep Time5 minutes mins
    Total Time5 minutes mins
    Course: Drink Choices
    Keyword: chocolate smoothie
    Servings: 1 - 16 ounce smoothie
    Calories: 360kcal
    Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

    Equipment

    • Pitted Medjool Dates
    • Cocoa Powder

    Ingredients

    • ½ cup roughly chopped kale leaves or spinach leaves
    • ½ cup sliced and frozen ripe banana
    • ¼ cup frozen blueberries
    • ¼ cup yogurt of your choice (plain Greek, flavored, or vegan option)
    • 2 pitted Medjool dates
    • 2 teaspoons unsweetened cocoa powder, plus more for garnish
    • 2 teaspoons mini dark chocolate chips, plus more for garnish
    • 1 cup milk of your choice, (dairy milk, almond, oat, coconut, etc.)
    • ½ cup ice, optional for a thicker smoothie
    instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

    Instructions

    • Add all ingredients to a blender and blend on high until combined.
    • Feel free to garnish your smoothie with additional dark chocolate chips and a sprinkle of cocoa powder for added visual appeal.

    Notes

    Nutrition

    Calories: 360kcal | Carbohydrates: 73g | Protein: 11g | Fat: 7g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 200mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 56g

    save this chocolate smoothie recipe on pinterest:

    Sneak your greens in with this delicious chocolate smoothie. Filled with ingredients like kale, cocoa powder, blueberries, and Medjool dates!

    Craving a smoothie bowl instead?

    Check out my chocolate smoothie bowl with hidden cauliflower rice and loads of nut butter!

    Blueberry Lemonade

    June 23, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

    Blueberry lemonade is a refreshing and easy drink to make for hot summer days. This "magic" version combines ingredients like butterfly pea powder and edible glitter for an enchanting spin on classic lemonade. You also have the option to customize the sweetener-use stevia, agave syrup, or simple syrup.

    Refreshing purple lemonade infused with blueberries and butterfly pea powder

    Disclosure: This post has been sponsored by U.S. Highbush Blueberry Council. All opinions are my own; I never feature a brand that I don't love! This post may also contain affiliate links. See my disclosure policy for more details.

    Table of Contents

    • Is this blueberry lemonade nutritious?
      • Why are blueberries healthy?
        • Heart health benefits
        • Brain health benefits
        • Hydration Benefits
      • How do you make magic blueberry lemonade?
        • 1. Combine blueberries and butterfly pea powder
        • 2. Add lemon juice
        • 3. Stir in all other ingredients
      • Tips and tricks
      • Customize it your way
      • Can you make it ahead of time?
      • What if there's leftover lemonade?
        • Have extra blueberries? Try making these other recipes:
        • save this blueberry butterfly pea lemonade on pinterest:
      • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

      Is this blueberry lemonade nutritious?

      Yes! This blueberry lemonade is lightly sweetened and contains simple ingredients that offer several health benefits. The real star of this recipe is blueberries alongside butterfly pea flower powder and vitamin C abundant lemons.

      Blueberry lemonade ingredients on white backdrop

      What is butterfly pea flower powder?

      Along with blueberries bright blue hue, this recipe uses butterfly pea flower powder to achieve its unique color. Butterfly pea powder is ground from the petals of the butterfly pea flower. Although it's much less researched than blueberries, butterfly pea flowers contain anthocyanins.

      Why are blueberries healthy?

      Blueberries are a good source of vitamin C, vitamin K, manganese, and phytonutrients like "anthocyanins". Anthocyanins are a type of pigment which gives these berries their bright blue hue. Blueberries can also have the following benefits.

      Heart health benefits

      A growing body of scientific evidence shows blueberries can be considered a heart-healthy fruit. For example, blueberries are a good source of dietary fiber (4 grams per 1 cup serving), which can help to promote overall heart health.

      Brain health benefits

      June is Brain Health Month! Did you know blueberries can play a role in keeping our mind sharp? This is important because in the United States, nearly six million older adults live with dementia. Since limited treatments for cognitive decline exist, preventative approaches and proper nutrition are so importance. 

      The randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled trial, "Blueberry Supplementation in Midlife for Dementia Risk Reduction," looked at the impact of blueberry supplementation for potential brain benefits (in the context of aging and insulin resistance). Twenty-seven participants which included men and women between the ages 50-60 years old with subjective cognitive decline and moderate insulin resistance were involved in the study. Over the course of 12 weeks, participants were randomly assigned to consume either freeze-dried blueberry powder or placebo powder daily.

      The study results found blueberries may induce metabolic and other benefits that could serve as an early intervention for preventing the cognitive decline associated with aging. Though, further research is needed to look at blueberry supplementation over a longer time period, with a larger sample size.

      Blueberry Lemonade 11

      Hydration Benefits

      Drinking this blueberry lemonade can help keep you hydrated throughout the day. Blueberries are about 85% water too so once you get to the bottom of your lemonade-be sure to pop in that boost of blue!

      How do you make magic blueberry lemonade?

      This recipe is super simple to make but adds a major wow factor to any picnic, girls night, or summer cookout. Gather your ingredients and get ready to make this blueberry butterfly pea lemonade in no time. 

      1. Combine blueberries and butterfly pea powder

      Stir blueberries and the powder in a pitcher of water until it turns bright blue. You can use either fresh or frozen blueberries. You can find the butterfly powder at a local spice/tea shop or online. 

      Blueberry-infused lemonade turning from vibrant blue to a delightful shade of purple
      Glare Remove

      2. Add lemon juice

      This is where it gets magical! The acidic nature of lemons triggers a color transformation when added to the blue water. As the lemon juice is added, the water changes from blue to a delightful light purple, and then eventually deepening into a captivating dark purple. Pretty cool, right?

      There's many different ways to juice a lemon. Ultimately, be sure to juice them before adding to the water to prevent any seeds from getting in.

      Edible glitter sprinkled over lemonade pitcher

      3. Stir in all other ingredients

      Finally, you'll stir in the sweetener, edible glitter, and ice. You can find edible glitter at specialty baking supply stores or online. If you can't get any in time, no worries. You can simply skip it.

      Tips and tricks

      • Sweetness - Adjust the sweet level to your preference by adding more or less sweetener.
      • Infusion - The longer this lemonade sits, the better the blueberry infusion will get!
      • Muddling Tip - If you're wanting a more pronounced blueberry flavor right away, gently muddle a few blueberries before adding them to the water.
      • Variations - Feel free to get creative with different variations! You can add over fresh mint or replace the still water with sparkling water for a fizzy twist.
      Tall pitcher filled with butterfly pea lemonade and topped with fresh blueberries

      Customize it your way

      Like all of my other recipes, this blueberry lemonade is completely customizable. You get to choose what liquid sweetener you want to use. Here are a few options to consider:

      • Agave Syrup - If you prefer a natural and mild sweetness, agave syrup is an excellent choice. It blends seamlessly with the flavors of blueberries and lemon.
      • Simple Syrup - For a classic touch, you can use simple syrup as your liquid sweetener. Made from equal parts sugar and water, simple syrup dissolves easily and evenly distributes sweetness throughout the drink.
      • Liquid Stevia - We often like to make a stevia lemonade. This is a great zero-calorie, zero-sugar option. You'll find liquid stevia in the baking aisle or online.
      • Other Options - If you have another favorite liquid sweetener in your pantry, feel free to use it! Maple syrup, honey, or date syrup are all great alternatives that will add their unique flavor notes to the Blueberry Lemonade.
      Glass of Blueberry lemonade with a vibrant blue purple hue and a touch of butterfly pea flower

      Can you make it ahead of time?

      Absolutely! You can prepare this blueberry lemonade ahead of time and store it in the fridge. Just don't add the ice ahead of time or it will dilute it. Then once you're ready to serve, top it off with ice cubes, give it a good stir, and pour.

      What if there's leftover lemonade?

      You can store any leftover blueberry lemonade in a covered glass or pitcher in the fridge. It will stay fresh for up to 4 days. If you'd like to prolong its shelf life, pour the remaining lemonade into ice cube trays and freeze. You can then use the frozen cubes to chill and flavor more homemade blueberry lemonade!

      Blueberry Lemonade Square
      Print Recipe
      5 from 2 votes

      Blueberry Lemonade

      This blueberry lemonade is the perfect refreshing, hydrating drink to make all summer long. This "magic" version combines color-changing ingredients like butterfly pea powder, fresh lemons, and sweetener of your choice.
      Prep Time5 minutes mins
      Total Time5 minutes mins
      Course: Drink Choices
      Cuisine: American
      Keyword: blueberry lemonade, butterfly pea lemonade, stevia lemonade
      Servings: 4 servings
      Calories: 40kcal
      Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

      Ingredients

      • 4 cups cold water
      • ½ cup fresh or frozen blueberries, plus more for garnish
      • ½ teaspoon butterfly pea flower powder
      • 4 medium lemons, juiced
      • Liquid sweetener of your choice, to taste* (I prefer to use about ½ teaspoon liquid stevia but you could also use about ¼ cup agave syrup or simple syrup)
      • Blue or silver edible glitter, optional
      • Ice cubes
      instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

      Instructions

      • In a 1 quart or larger pitcher, add 4 cups of cold water and blueberries.
      • Gradually stir butterfly pea powder into the water. Continue stirring until the powder is dissolved and the water turns a vibrant blue color.
      • Next, pour the juice of the lemons over the water. The acidity will turn the water from a blue color to light purple at first. Then, as it settles it will turn into a darker purple color.
      • Next, add the liquid sweetener of your choice and a sprinkle of edible glitter if desired. Stir well until fully incorporated.
      • Add ice cubes into the pitcher before pouring into individual glasses filled with ice.
      • Garish individual glasses with more blueberries.

      Video

      Notes

      *Note: This definitely leans towards the less sweet side, but feel free to add more to taste if you like your lemonade more sweet!

      Nutrition

      Serving: 1serving | Calories: 40kcal | Carbohydrates: 12g | Protein: 1g | Sodium: 10mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 4g

      Have extra blueberries? Try making these other recipes:

      • Blueberry Sheet Pan Pancake
      • Berry Chia Jam
      • Blueberry Caprese Skewers
      • Blueberry Quesadilla

      Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

      In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

      save this blueberry butterfly pea lemonade on pinterest:

      Blueberry lemonade is a refreshing and easy drink to make for hot summer days. This

      Strawberry Cookies

      May 30, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

      These strawberry cookies are a great way to satisfy your sweet tooth with a boost of protein (7 grams per serving!). They're filled with nutrient-dense additions like protein powder, freeze dried strawberries, and chocolate chips of your choice. Plus, this recipe comes together in just 20 minutes.

      Cookies next to Cheerful Choices cutting board

      Disclosure: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. Thanks so much for your support! See my disclosure policy for more details.

      Table of Contents

      • Are these strawberry cookies healthy?
      • How do you make strawberry cookies?
        • 1. Gather your ingredients
        • 2. Cream butter and sugar
        • 3. Add in rest of ingredients
        • 4. Roll into balls and bake
      • Tips and tricks
      • Can you bake cookies in an air fryer?
      • Customize it your way
      • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
        • save this strawberry cookie recipe on pinterest:

      Are these strawberry cookies healthy?

      These cookies do contain indulgent ingredients like butter and sugar, but they can still have a place in a balanced diet. My suggestion is to be mindful of portion sizes and enjoy around 2 cookies in one sitting. By keeping the portions in check, you can still satisfy your sweet tooth without going overboard. Remember, moderation is key!

      These cookies also use freeze dried strawberries filled with fiber and vitamin C. Plus, in the flour mixture we're adding protein powder for a boost of protein. In fact, a serving of 2 small cookies packs in 7+ grams of protein depending on what protein powder you use.

      Holding up freshly baked strawberry cookies, perfect blend of sweet and fruity.

      Why is protein important?

      Adding protein powder to recipes like smoothies, mug cakes, and cookies can boost potential health benefits. Here are some of the benefits of higher protein cookies:

      Increased satiety

      Adding high protein ingredients to cookies can increase satiety and help reduce overall calorie intake. This can be particularly helpful for those looking to lose weight or maintain a healthy weight.

      Improved muscle health

      Protein is essential for building and maintaining muscle mass. Enjoying protein powder in a variety of different recipes is a convenient way to boost your protein intake.

      Better blood sugar control

      Protein can help regulate blood sugar levels by slowing down the absorption of carbohydrates. Adding high protein ingredients to cookies may help prevent the blood sugar from spiking.

      How do you make strawberry cookies?

      These higher protein strawberry cookies come together in no time. Feel free to use a stand mixer, hand mixer, or food processor to blend.

      1. Gather your ingredients

      For this recipe, we're using ingredients such as butter, sugar, flour, vanilla extract, protein powder, freeze-dried strawberries, and chocolate chips.

      Ingredients on white backdrop

      2. Cream butter and sugar

      Start by creaming together softened butter and sugar until the mixture becomes smooth and creamy. This creates a luscious base for your cookies.

      Dough mixed together

      3. Add in rest of ingredients

      Next, incorporate the remaining ingredients, including flour, vanilla extract, protein powder, crushed freeze-dried strawberries, and your choice of chocolate chips. Mix everything together until a thick dough forms.

      Hand mixer next to dough

      4. Roll into balls and bake

      Take the dough and roll it into small balls, about 1 inch in diameter. Place them on a lined baking sheet and bake in a preheated oven at 350°F (175°C) for 10-12 minutes, or until the edges turn golden brown. Let them cool slightly before enjoying.

      Strawberry cookie scoops
      Strawberry cookies finished on baking sheet

      Tips and tricks

      • Strawberry option: We don't recommend using fresh strawberries. For the best results, use freeze dried strawberries. You can find these in the dried fruit or snack aisle.
      • Softening the butter: To easily soften the butter, leave it at room temperature for about 30 minutes or overnight before starting the recipe. Alternatively, you can microwave the butter in short intervals, checking frequently to ensure it softens without melting.
      • Baking time and temperature: Keep a close eye on the cookies while they bake. Oven temperatures may vary, so start checking at around 10 minutes. The cookies are done when the edges turn golden brown. Avoid overbaking to maintain a soft and chewy texture.

      Can you bake cookies in an air fryer?

      Yes! If you prefer not to use your oven or need to make a smaller batch of cookies, the air fryer is a great alternative. Simply line your air fryer basket with parchment paper that fits properly, then air fry the cookies at 300ºF for 6-8 minutes until the edges turn golden brown. This method allows for quick and efficient baking in the air fryer while still achieving delicious results.

      Can you turn these into strawberry cookie bars?

      If you're not in the mood to scoop the dough into individual cookies, I have tested making this batch of dough into cookies bars too. Follow the same instructions for making the dough. Then, press the dough into an 8x8 square baking pan. Bake at the same temperature of 350ºF (175°C) for about 18-20 minutes until just lightly golden brown around the edges. Be cautious of overbaking as it can cause try dry cookie bars.

      Strawberry cookies finished on baking sheet

      Customize it your way

      Like all of my other recipes, these strawberry cookies are completely customizable. 

      • Chocolate chips of your choice - You get to choose any chocolate chips you want to use. We personally love using dark chocolate chips for extra antioxidants. You can also use white chocolate chips or milk chocolate chips. Any flavor pairs great with the strawberries!
      • Sugar substitute - If you're looking to lower to sugar content, feel free to replace the sugar for a 1:1 substitute such as Purecane or monk fruit.
      • Flour - If you follow a gluten-free diet, feel free to use a gluten-free flour in place of regular flour.
      Strawberry cookies made with protein powder

      Perfect for picnics

      These strawberry cookies are perfect for spring picnics and entertaining. Their soft and chewy texture, combined with the flavors of freeze-dried strawberries and chocolate chips, make them a delightful treat to enjoy outdoors. 

      Want more picnic recipes? Try these:

      • Creamy Chicken Salad
      • Rainbow Chickpea Salad
      • Strawberry Energy Bites
      • Veggie Avocado Sandwich
      Strawberry cookies with freeze dried strawberries on plate

      Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

      In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

      Strawberry Cookies Square
      Print Recipe
      5 from 1 vote

      Higher Protein Strawberry Cookies

      These strawberry cookies are a great way to satisfy your sweet tooth with a boost of protein. They're filled with nutrient-dense additions like protein powder, freeze dried strawberries, and chocolate chips of your choice.
      Prep Time10 minutes mins
      Cook Time10 minutes mins
      Total Time20 minutes mins
      Course: Sweet Treat Choices
      Cuisine: American
      Keyword: high protein, picnic, strawberry cookies
      Servings: 24 small cookies
      Calories: 220kcal
      Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

      Ingredients

      • ½ cup 1 stick unsalted butter, softened
      • ½ cup white sugar or 1:1 sugar substitute
      • 1 large egg
      • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
      • ½ cup vanilla protein powder
      • 1 cup white whole wheat flour or regular white flour (or 1:1 gluten-free flour blend)
      • ½ teaspoon baking powder
      • ¼ teaspoon salt
      • ½ cup freeze-dried strawberries
      • ½ cup chocolate chips of your choice (white chocolate, milk chocolate, or dark chocolate)
      instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

      Instructions

      • Preheat your oven to 350°F (175°C). Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and set it aside.
      • In a large mixing bowl, cream together the softened butter and granulated sweetener until well combined and creamy.
      • Add the egg and vanilla extract to the bowl. Beat the mixture until smooth.
      • In a separate bowl, whisk together the protein powder, flour, baking powder, and a pinch of salt.
      • Gradually add the dry ingredient mixture to the mixing bowl. Stir until a thick dough forms. Gently blend in strawberries and choc chips until incorporated.
      • Use a 1-inch cookie scooper or spoon to roll the dough into small balls (about 1 inch in diameter) and place them on the prepared baking sheet. 
      • Bake the cookies in the preheated oven for 10-12 minutes, or until the edges are golden brown.*
      • Remove from the oven and let them cool on the baking sheet for a few minutes. Then transfer them to a wire rack to cool completely.
      • Store any extra cookies at room temperature in an airtight container for up to 5 days.

      Notes

      *Air fryer instructions: If you prefer not to use your oven or need to make a smaller batch of cookies, the air fryer is a great alternative. Simply line your air fryer basket with parchment paper that fits properly, then air fry the cookies at 300ºF for 6-7 minutes until the edges turn a lovely golden brown. This method allows for quick and efficient baking in the air fryer while still achieving delicious results.
      See instructions above for turning these into strawberry cookie bars instead of individual cookies.

      Nutrition

      Serving: 2small cookies | Calories: 220kcal | Carbohydrates: 23g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Sodium: 90mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 12g

      save this strawberry cookie recipe on pinterest:

      Pinterest Updated Cookies

      20+ Delicious Smoothie Bowl Recipes

      May 12, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 2 Comments

      In need of some smoothie bowl inspiration? Look no further. I've rounded up 20 of the best smoothie bowl recipes to fuel your mornings. These recipes are vegan or include vegan-friendly options!

      Overhead shot of different smoothie bowl recipes

      This post was first published on June 13, 2021. It was updated with a few additional smoothie bowl recipes on May 12, 2023.

      Table of Contents

      • What is a vegan smoothie bowl?
      • Customize it your way
      • Are smoothie bowls healthy?

        What is a vegan smoothie bowl?

        Smoothies bowls are a thicker version of smoothies served in a bowl with delicious toppings sprinkled over top. To make it vegan, you would omit or substitute any dairy or animal products.

        Customize it your way

        These smoothie bowl recipes are vegan so they contain no animal products or provide vegan substitutions. However, you can easily customize it to fit your dietary preferences. 

        • Yogurt - Many smoothie bowl recipes call for yogurt to add creaminess. Vegan friendly options include almond, oat, or coconut yogurt. If you are not vegan, you can use Greek yogurt or regular yogurt.
        • Milk - In order to break down the frozen ingredients, smoothie bowl recipes will call for a splash of milk. Vegan options would include plant-based milk such as almond, coconut, oat, rice, or soy milk. Non-vegan options would be dairy milk like skim milk or whole milk. 
        • Sweetener - Some recipes may call for a touch of sweetness to compliment the fruit and greens. Vegan friendly sweeteners include agave, maple syrup, or date syrup. Feel free to also use honey if you are not vegan. 

        Are smoothie bowls healthy?

        As a dietitian, I love how smoothie bowls are filled with vibrant fruits and vegetables like berries, beets, cauliflower, spinach, and bananas. All these different colors represent different nutrients that keep us healthy. For example:

        • Blueberries - Blueberries are rich in anthocyanin which provide anti-inflammatory effects.
        • Spinach - Spinach contain a carotenoid called lutein which helps protect against damage to the eyes.
        • Bananas - Bananas are packed with beneficial antioxidants, potassium, and dietary fiber.

        If you have a goal to include more fruits and vegetables in your day, smoothie bowls are a great way to go!

        Need more help creating realistic and actionable goals in the kitchen? Check out my virtual nutrition Coaching + Cooking program.

        Peanut Butter Smoothie Bowl
        If you're a PB lover, this one's for you! This protein-packed smoothie bowl is filled with frozen bananas, peanut butter, and lots of crunchy toppings.
        Get Recipe
        Peanut Butter Smoothie Bowl 3 scaled
        Chocolate Cherry Smoothie Bowl
        Cherries are in season all summer long. If you find yourself with extras, freeze them and throw them into this delicious chocolate cherry bowl.
        Get Recipe
        chocolate cherry fruit smoothie bowl recipe
        Matcha Smoothie Bowl
        Packed with energizing ingredients like matcha powder, dates, and spinach-this smoothie bowl is perfect for breakfast or an afternoon pick-me-up. Top with coconut energy bites and other satisfying toppings of your choice!
        Get Recipe
        Matcha Smoothie Bowl 1 scaled
        Dragon Fruit Smoothie Bowl
        Achieve that Insta-worthy pink smoothie bowl by blending together vibrant fruit and yogurt. As a bonus, berries are packed with immune-supporting vitamin C.
        Get Recipe
        Dragon Fruit Smoothie Bowl 5 e1627532474471
        Cacao Banana Smoothie Bowl
        Bananas + Chocolate...can you think of better combo?? Blend this bowl up for a healthier way to curb your sweet tooth.
        Get Recipe
        banana cacao smoothie bowl square
        Energy-Boosting Green Smoothie
        Blend together frozen bananas, spinach, and protein powder for a protein and fiber-packed bowl. This powerful combo helps us feel more energized throughout the day!
        Get Recipe
        247 energy boosting green smoothie 8
        Chocolate Berry Smoothie Bowl
        Have some extra chocolate protein powder you're not sure what to do with? Add it into this slightly sweet smoothie bowl. Top with extra blueberries and granola for a crunch.
        Get Recipe
        Chocolate Berry Smoothie Bowl 3
        Strawberry Smoothie Bowl
        This strawberry smoothie bowl is completely customizable and super easy to blend together. It tastes just like angel food cake with fresh strawberries on top!
        Get Recipe
        Strawberry Smoothie Bowl 7
        Pineapple Mango Smoothie
        Creamy, thick, and tropical-this smoothie bowl has all the summer feels. Perfect to enjoy on the beach or close your eyes and pretend you're there!
        Get Recipe
        Screen Shot 2021 06 13 at 8.27.54 PM
        Sweet Kale Smoothie Bowl
        Sneak some veggies into your morning bowl with kale-rich in vitamin K, calcium, and fiber. Blend kale together with pineapple and peaches for a nourishing combo.
        Get Recipe
        Sweet Kale
        Blueberry Banana Smoothie Bowl
        This recipe is customizable-choose your favorite plant based milk and protein powder to use. Blended together with frozen bananas and frozen blueberries for a classic combo.
        Get Recipe
        Banana Blueberry Smoothie Bowl
        Acai Berry Bowl
        Acai is a type of berry that grows in South American rainforests. In the United States, you typically find them in frozen packets-perfect to add to smoothie bowls like this one.
        Get Recipe
        acai bowl recipe 6
        Blue Smoothie Bowl
        Blue spirulina is a powder derived from blue-green algae. It's rich in beneficial nutrients like vitamins, minerals, and antioxidants. It's also responsible for creating the lovely blue hue for this smoothie bowl.
        Get Recipe
        Vegan Blue Smoothie Bowl 3 e1623617297530
        Beet Smoothie Bowl
        Beets may sound like a strange addition to a smoothie bowl but paired with frozen berries and the result is antioxidant-rich, velvety goodness.
        Get Recipe
        BerryBeetSmoothieBowl BeetoftheWIld MichelleMcCowanPhotography ALLRIGHTSRESERVED 16
        Banana Peach Smoothie Bowl
        Depending on the time of year you can buy fresh peaches and freeze them or opt for pre-frozen peaches at your grocery store. Either way you'll create a sweet and satisfying smoothie bowl.
        Get Recipe
        delicious banana peach smoothie bowl square
        Chocolate Smoothie Bowl
        This healthy chocolate smoothie bowl is a tasty, sweet breakfast loaded with nutrients. It's filled with nourishing ingredients like cauliflower, cocoa powder, and protein powder of your choice.
        Get Recipe
        Chocolate Smoothie Bowl 1
        Pitaya Bowl
        Pitaya (also known as dragonfruit) creates that beautiful bright pink hue. It's also filled with important nutrients like iron, magnesium, and vitamin C.
        Get Recipe
        Pitaya Bowl 2 2
        Strawberry Rhubarb Crisp Smoothie Bowl
        This bowl is a refreshing and healthy version of a classic summer treat. Blend together frozen strawberries, rhubarb, and banana with a touch of almond butter and cinnamon.
        Get Recipe
        strawberry rhubarb crisp smoothie bowl featured 1
        Probiotic Smoothie Bowl
        Start your morning right with this dairy-free probiotic smoothie made with honeydew melon, raspberries, and avocado. To get extra fancy, serve it in a cut melon.
        Get Recipe
        melon smoothie feat image.pngfit6802c900ssl1
        Tropical Smoothie Bowl Recipe
        This satisfying breakfast bowl has a secret ingredient... soft tofu! Tofu packs in extra protein and creaminess.
        Get Recipe
        healthy tropical smoothie bowl recipe 8 e1623637926593
        Avocado Smoothie Bowl
        Blending avocado into smoothie bowls not only adds creaminess but it also adds healthy unsaturated fats. Sprinkle in monkfruit for an extra touch of sweetness.
        Get Recipe
        keto avocado smoothie bowl 1
        Mermaid Smoothie Bowl
        This dietitian-approved smoothie bowl is filled with nourishing ingredients like bananas, citrus, and chia seeds. All blended together with spirulina, which gives it that unique blue-green color.
        Get Recipe
        mermaid smoothie 9 scaled 1

        Looking for more smoothie bowl recipes?

        Check out this "Beautiful Smoothie Bowls" book by Carissa Bonham on Amazon filled with 80 other easy, nutritious bowls. My favorite is the Berries and Cream recipe! 

        What is your favorite smoothie bowl to make? Leave a comment below and let me know.

        save these smoothie bowl recipes on pinterest:

        Peanut butter smoothie bowl

        Chocolate Smoothie Bowl

        April 19, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

        Who says chocolate is reserved just for dessert?! This healthy chocolate smoothie bowl is a tasty, sweet breakfast loaded with nutrients. It's filled with nourishing ingredients like cauliflower, cocoa powder, and protein powder of your choice.

        Chocolate smoothie bowl in coconut bowl

        Disclosure: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. Thanks so much for your support! See my disclosure policy for more details.

        Table of Contents

        • Is this chocolate smoothie bowl healthy?
        • Customize it your way
        • What toppings should I use?
        • Where did you get the coconut bowls shown?
          • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

          Is this chocolate smoothie bowl healthy?

          This chocolate smoothie bowl recipe is packed with nutritious ingredients that provide a bunch of health benefits. 

          • Banana: Bananas are a great source of potassium, which helps to regulate blood pressure and support healthy heart function. They're also high in fiber, which can help to promote digestive health and keep you feeling satisfied.
          • Cauliflower: Cauliflower is an excellent source of vitamin C, which is essential for immune function and skin health. Like bananas, it's pretty neutral in taste so it takes on the chocolate flavor.
          • Yogurt: Yogurt is a great source of protein and probiotics, which can help to support gut health and improve digestion. It's also a good source of calcium, which is essential for strong bones and teeth. I like to choose Greek varieties to pack in the most protein.
          • Protein Powder: Protein powder often gets a bad rap, but I think it's a convenient way to give yourself a protein boost with minimal effort. Try adding a scoop to coffee, cereal bars, or mug cakes too.
          • Nut Butter: All types of nut butters contain healthy fats and protein. We call for any nut butter of your choice so you can use your favorite.
          • Dates: Dates are a great way to naturally sweeten this bowl without any added sugars. I prefer Medjool dates which are soft and have a caramel-like taste. Stuffing them with peanut butter is a great snack!
          Chocolate smoothie bowl in coconut bowl next to wooden spoon

          What are the health benefits of cocoa powder?

          Cocoa powder is another key ingredient in this chocolate smoothie bowl recipe. It's a good source of antioxidants called "flavanols". Research has shown these flavanols may help improve heart and brain health.

          Stick with minimally processed cocoa powder and be mindful of any added sugars. We like to use unsweetened cocoa powder.

          Customize it your way

          Like all of my other recipes, this chocolate smoothie bowl is completely customizable. You get to choose what protein powder, nut butter, and milk you want to use.

          • For the protein powder, we love to use a chocolate flavored variety. However, you could use vanilla or another flavor. Feel free to use any type of protein you prefer such as whey protein or a plant-based one.
          • For the nut butter, use whatever you have in your pantry. You can even use a seed butter if you have a nut allergy.
          • For the milk, we love using almond milk but any milk would be great here.
          Chocolate smoothie bowl in coconut bowl

          What toppings should I use?

          The toppings are also totally customizable. Here are some ideas to get you started:

          • To make yours look like the photos shown: add over sliced banana, granola, cocoa nibs, and hemp seeds
          • For a s'mores vibe: add over mini chocolate chips, and mini marshmallows, and crushed graham crackers 
          • For a chocolate covered strawberry vibe: add over sliced strawberries, white chocolate chips, and shaved dark chocolate
          Reusable utensils from Jungle Culture

          Where did you get the coconut bowls shown?

          You know we're all about sustainable kitchen choices. That's why we love using Jungle Culture's reusable straws, utensils, and bowls. They also have a number of other plant-friendly home goods.

          Their products are made from ethically-sourced materials like bamboo and coconut shells. Whereas coconut shells would normally be discarded, using them to create these beautiful bowls gives them another life! Plus, this product has given farmers a secondary income. 

          Additionally, these products are often handmade by artisans in small communities in Vietnam. This provides them with a sustainable income source and helps support local economies. 

          Chocolate smoothie bowl topped with granola and bananas

          Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

          In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

          Chocolate Smoothie Bowl 1
          Print Recipe
          5 from 2 votes

          Chocolate Smoothie Bowl

          This healthy chocolate smoothie bowl is a tasty, sweet breakfast loaded with nutrients. It's filled with nourishing ingredients like cauliflower, cocoa powder, and protein powder of your choice.
          Course: Breakfast Choices
          Keyword: chocolate, smoothie bowl, smoothies
          Servings: 1 smoothie bowl
          Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

          Equipment

          • Coconut Bowls
          • Ninja Foodi Smoothie Bowl Maker

          Ingredients

          Smoothie Ingredients:

          • 1 large banana, sliced and frozen (about 1 cup)
          • ¼ cup frozen cauliflower rice or florets
          • ¼ cup plain or chocolate Greek yogurt
          • 2 tablespoons chocolate protein powder of your choice (whey, soy, pea, etc.)
          • 1 tablespoon unsweetened cocoa powder
          • 1 tablespoon nut butter of your choice (peanut butter, almond butter, cashew butter, etc.)
          • 1 medjool date
          • ¼ cup milk of your choice (dairy, almond, soy, hemp, etc.)

          Toppings of your choice:

          • Sliced bananas
          • Granola
          • Cocoa nibs
          • Berries
          • Shaved dark chocolate
          • Creamy nut butter
          • For a s'mores variation: add over mini chocolate chips, mini marshmallows, and crushed graham crackers
          instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

          Instructions

          • Add all smoothie ingredients to your blender or food processor and secure the lid on.
          • Blend on high speed until ingredients are completely broken down and smooth. If you are using a Ninja Foodi Smoothie Bowl Maker, use the preset "bowl" option.
          • Use a spatula to spoon mixture into a bowl, then add over toppings of your choice.

          save this chocolate smoothie bowl recipe on pinterest:

          Save this smoothie bowl on Pinterest

          Want more chocolate? Try these other sweet recipes:

          • Chocolate Popcorn
          • Avocado Truffles
          • Vegan Crunch Bark
          • Whole Wheat Chocolate Chip Cookies

          Mediterranean Quinoa Stuffed Peppers

          April 14, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

          These Mediterranean Quinoa Stuffed Peppers are the perfect vegetarian recipe to meal prep ahead of time. Not only are these stuffed peppers super easy to make, but they're also loaded with nourishing ingredients and flavorful spices! Plus, you get to customize them with any nuts of your choice. This recipe is gluten-free and has vegan options.

          Stuffed Peppers on a plate over a yellow kitchen towel

          Disclosure: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. Thanks so much for your support! See my disclosure policy for more details.

          Table of Contents

          • What are stuffed peppers?
            • How do you prep pepper halves?
          • Are these quinoa stuffed peppers healthy?
          • Customize it your way
          • Can you make this recipe vegan?
          • How do you make these vegetarian peppers?
            • 1. Cook your quinoa
            • 2. Stir in spices, nuts, and feta
            • 3. Spoon into peppers
            • 4. Bake until tender
          • Can you air fry these peppers?
          • Other tips and tricks
          • Can you make them ahead of time?
          • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

          What are stuffed peppers?

          Stuffed peppers are an easy and delicious dish to meal prep. Simply hollow out pepper halves, stuff with a prepared mixture, and bake until the peppers are slightly tender. For this recipe, we've created a Mediterranean, vegetarian version filled with fluffy quinoa.

          Quinoa Stuffed Peppers with feta on top

          What peppers should I use?

          You can use any color of sweet bell peppers including red, orange, or yellow peppers. When selecting peppers for this recipe, try to choose ones that are round, firm, and free of blemishes or soft spots. If you have an odd-shaped pepper, it will still work but it may be a bit harder to stuff.

          Yellow, red, and orange bell peppers

          How do you prep pepper halves?

          1. To create the hollowed pepper halves, we like to slice straight down the middle with a chef's knife. 
          2. Then you can use a smaller paring knife to gently cut in front of the stem to remove the core.
          3. Finally, use a small spoon or your fingers to scrap out any extra white skin and seeds. You can also gently tap the back of the pepper to shake extra seeds loose.
          Peppers with core in tact
          Peppers with core and seeds removed
          Prepared pepper halves in white pan

          Are these quinoa stuffed peppers healthy?

          Yes! As a dietitian, I developed this recipe to highlight nutrient-dense ingredients like bell peppers, quinoa, and nuts.

          • Bell Peppers are an excellent source of vitamins C, A, and K. These vitamins are important for immune and skin health. Peppers are also high in antioxidants, which can help reduce the risk of chronic diseases such as cancer and heart disease.
          • Quinoa is a nutrient-dense grain that's high in protein, fiber, and essential vitamins and minerals. It's also gluten-free, making it a great option for those with gluten sensitivities or celiac disease. Quinoa is an excellent source of plant-based protein, making it an ideal option for vegetarians and vegans.
          • Nuts are filled with a good amount of plant-based protein. For example, pistachios pack in 6 grams of plant-based protein per ¼ cup. Nuts are also a good source of fiber and healthy fats. This trio of protein, fiber, and fat makes them a satiating addition to this vegetarian meal. 
          Mediterranean Quinoa Stuffed Peppers

          Customize it your way

          Like all of my other recipes, this Mediterranean Stuffed Pepper recipe is completely customizable. You get to choose what type of nuts you want to use. Here are some different choices:

          • Roasted and Salted Shelled Pistachios - When testing out this recipe, We especially loved using pistachios. They're savory flavor pairs perfectly with the Mediterranean spices. 
          • Almonds - We recommend using roasted almonds if possible. It gives it an extra nutty flavor.
          • Walnuts - Walnuts provide a satisfying crunch alongside a healthy dose of protein and healthy fats.
          • Pine nuts - Pine nuts tend to be more expensive but their buttery flavor is so good! If you use pine nuts, there's no need to chop them since they are already a smaller nut.

          Can you make this recipe vegan?

          This recipe uses feta cheese, which is a dairy product. However, if you follow a plant-based lifestyle, you can easily swap the feta cheese or a vegan alternative. This simple swap will make this recipe completely vegan friendly.

          How do you make these vegetarian peppers?

          You'll love making these Mediterranean stuffed peppers because they use minimal dishes and are ready to go in a matter of minutes. 

          1. Cook your quinoa

          Quinoa can be somewhat bland, right? So we've decided to pump up the flavor. You can do this by first sauteing a shallot in the quinoa pot. Then, I always like to add over dry quinoa and toast it. This will bring out a deeper, nutty flavor. Finally, we like to cook the quinoa in broth but you could also swap for water. 

          After about 15-20 minutes, you'll reveal fluffy quinoa that's ready for the rest of the ingredients.

          Toasting quinoa in a pan
          Fluffy cooked quinoa before adding to stuffed peppers

          2. Stir in spices, nuts, and feta

          The less dishes, the better. That's why I've made this recipe as simple as possible. After the quinoa is done, you can stir in the spices, nuts, and feta cheese to the same pot.

          Cooked quinoa with pistachios stirred in

          3. Spoon into peppers

          This mixture is truly amazing on its own, but this is where you'll carefully spoon it into the prepared pepper halves. I like to use a regular spoon to add it over the pepper then gently push down to get as much of the quinoa in as possible.

          Mediterranean Quinoa Stuffed Peppers 9
          Before Baking
          Mediterranean Quinoa Stuffed Peppers 17
          After Baking

          4. Bake until tender

          Add to your preheated oven and let it bake. It will take around 40-45 minutes to achieve a nice, tender texture. If you're impatient, that's okay. You can pull them out sooner, you'll just have more of a raw, crunchy pepper.

          Can you air fry these peppers?

          We are big air fryer fans and this recipe passes the test. Simple air fry at the same temperature 325ºF for about 10 minutes.

          Before air frying
          After air frying

          Other tips and tricks

          Here's some tips to keep in mind for these Quinoa Stuffed Peppers:

          • We like to add the feta before baking to achieve a crunchy, slightly charred feta on top. If you prefer a softer feta, wait until after baking to sprinkle the feta on top.
          • In the instructions, you'll notice we let the peppers rest for about 5 minutes. This lets the peppers become slightly more tender and allows the filling to set. 
          • If you want to add meat to these peppers, we recommend mixing in a small amount of cooked and cubed chicken or cooked ground beef to the quinoa mixture before stuffing the peppers.
          • We also love enjoying these stuffed peppers with a fried egg on top for breakfast!
          Mediterranean Quinoa Stuffed Peppers in white pan

          Can you make them ahead of time?

          Yes! These vegetarian peppers are an excellent option for meal prep. We like to stuff the peppers with the quinoa mixture then store them in the fridge until ready to bake.

          How do you store them?

          If you have leftovers, you can store the stuffed peppers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days. To reheat, simply microwave them for 1-2 minutes or until heated through. 

          If you want to freeze the quinoa stuffed peppers, wrap them individually in plastic wrap or vacuum seal and store them in the freezer for up to 3 months. To reheat, thaw them in the fridge overnight and then microwave them for 1-2 minutes or until heated through.

          Red, yellow, and orange stuffed pepper

          Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

          In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

          Square Mediterranean Quinoa Stuffed Peppers 16 copy
          Print Recipe
          4.50 from 2 votes

          Mediterranean Quinoa Stuffed Peppers

          These Mediterranean Quinoa Stuffed Peppers are a flavorful vegetarian recipe to meal prep ahead of time!
          Prep Time20 minutes mins
          Cook Time1 hour hr
          Total Time1 hour hr 20 minutes mins
          Course: Main Dish Choices
          Cuisine: Mediterranean
          Keyword: air fryer, mediterranean, quinoa, stuffed peppers
          Servings: 4 servings
          Calories: 487kcal
          Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

          Equipment

          • Pistachios
          • Whole Almonds
          • Pre-rinsed Quinoa
          • Walnuts

          Ingredients

          • 2 tablespoons olive oil or avocado oil
          • 1 shallot, diced
          • 1 cup pre-rinsed, uncooked quinoa
          • 2 cups vegetable broth
          • 1 teaspoon dried parsley
          • 1 teaspoon dried oregano
          • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
          • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
          • ½ teaspoon onion powder
          • ½ teaspoon paprika
          • ½ teaspoon black pepper
          • 1 cup nuts of your choice, roughly chopped (We especially love to use roasted pistachios but you can also use almonds, walnuts, pine nuts, etc.)
          • ½ cup crumbled feta cheese, plus more for topping (swap for vegan feta for vegan version)
          • 4 sweet bell peppers color of your choice, halved and seeds removed (red, yellow, or orange peppers) - you'll end up with 8 halves in total
          instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

          Instructions

          • Preheat oven to 375ºF.
          • Heat oil in a medium-sized pot over medium heat. Add shallot and quinoa and cook for 1-2 minutes until quinoa is slightly toasted.
          • Pour over broth, stir, and let mixture come to a boil. Reduce heat to low, cover with a lid, and let simmer for 15-20 minutes until the water has been absorbed.
          • Remove pot from the heat and let cool for 5 minutes. To that same pot (because we're all about less dishes), add over all spices, chopped nuts, and feta cheese. Gently stir to combine.
          • Add peppers to a large 9x13 inch pan. Using a large spoon, stuff quinoa mixture evenly over prepared pepper halves. Top each pepper with a sprinkle more of feta cheese.* 
          • Bake stuffed peppers for 40-45 minutes until peppers are tender and feta cheese is golden brown on top. Remove from oven, add foil on top of pan, and let rest for 5 minutes.**
          • Alternative Air Frying Instructions:Add peppers to air fryer basket and cook at 350ºF for 10 minutes. Let rest in the air fryer basket for 5 minutes before serving.

          Video

          Notes

          *Feta Note: Adding the feta before baking will result in crunchy, slightly charred feta on top. If you prefer a softer feta, wait until AFTER baking to sprinkle on top.
          **Resting Note: You can skip the resting step but I find it allows the peppers to become slightly more tender before enjoying.

          Nutrition

          Serving: 2stuffed pepper halves | Calories: 487kcal | Carbohydrates: 45g | Protein: 18g | Fat: 29g | Sodium: 820mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 12g

          save this quinoa stuffed pepper recipe on pinterest:

          Save these Mediterranean Quinoa Stuffed Peppers on Pinterest

          Want more? Try these other bell pepper recipes:

          • Sweet Chili Chicken Stir Fry
          • Rainbow Chickpea Salad
          • One Pot Chili
          • Brown Rice Lentil Stuffed Peppers
          • Easy Pasta Salad

          Nut Crusted Salmon

          March 31, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 8 Comments

          This easy nut crusted salmon takes just 5 minutes to whip together and is on the table in under 30 minutes! The honey mustard glaze topped with nuts of your choice makes for the perfect combination of sweet and savory. Customize with walnuts, pecans, almonds, pistachios, or your favorite type of nut.

          Nut crusted salmon on plate with salad and lemon slice

          Table of Contents

          • Why you'll love it
          • Is nut crusted salmon healthy?
          • What ingredients do you need?
          • How do you make nut crusted salmon?
            • 1. Make the honey glaze
            • 2. Pour the glaze over the salmon
            • 3. Press chopped nuts onto the glaze
            • 4. Bake the salmon
          • Can you use individual salmon filets?
          • Can you air fry this salmon?
          • Can you grill this salmon?
          • Customize it your way
          • What to serve with it
          • Can you make it ahead?
          • Meal prep and storage
          • Want to watch this recipe in action?
          • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
            • Try these other healthy salmon recipes:
            • save this nut crusted salmon recipe on pinterest:

          This post was first published on January 31, 2020. It was updated on May 23, 2025.

          Why you'll love it

          • Quick and easy: This recipe comes together in just 5 minutes of prep and 12-15 minutes of baking. Perfect for weeknights or a last-minute dinner idea!
          • Totally customizable: You get to pick your favorite mix of nuts-almonds, pistachios, walnuts, or even a blend. You can also use individual filets or a whole salmon piece.

          Flavor-packed: The honey dijon glaze plus the crunchy nuts make a sweet-savory combo that's totally irresistible.

          Nut crusted salmon filets on baking sheet with different nut crusts

          Is nut crusted salmon healthy?

          Yes, this dish is full of good-for-you nutrients! Salmon is considered a heart-healthy fish because it contains omega-3 fatty acids, which have been proven to be beneficial for us. Fish overall is an incredible source of healthy fats, protein, and vitamin D-which can be hard to find in other food sources.

          Eating fish twice a week is the magic number. It may seem like a daunting task to prepare a nice seafood meal. Luckily, this nut crusted salmon is so easy to make.

          Nuts also provide healthy fats, plant-based protein, and fiber. Whatever type of nut you choose you can't go wrong as they each have unique benefits!

          Nut crusted salmon filets on baking sheet with different nut crusts
          Nut crusted salmon on plate with salad and lemon slice
          Nut crusted salmon on fork

          What ingredients do you need?

          Here's what makes this dish shine:

          • Salmon filets: You can either use one whole filet or individual portions.
          • Honey: Adds natural sweetness and helps the nuts stick.
          • Dijon mustard: For tang and depth of flavor.
          • Fresh thyme and rosemary: Gives it herby freshness.
          • Nuts of your choice: You can use almonds, pistachios, pecans, walnuts, or a blend-whatever you have on hand.
          • Lemon wedges: Optional, but they add a bright, zesty finish.

          How do you make nut crusted salmon?

          1. Make the honey glaze

          In a small bowl, stir together honey, dijon mustard, thyme, rosemary, salt, and pepper. This glaze is sweet, tangy, and aromatic. If you don't have fresh herbs, go ahead and use dried.

          Honey dijon glaze mixed together in small bowl

          2. Pour the glaze over the salmon

          Place your salmon on a rimmed baking sheet. Spoon the glaze evenly over the top-coated but not dripping. Extra glaze can be saved for drizzling at the end or tossed with veggies for roasting.

          Honey dijon glaze over salmon filet

          3. Press chopped nuts onto the glaze

          Roughly chop your favorite nuts and press them into the glaze on top of the salmon.

          Nut crusted salmon filets on baking sheet with different nut crusts before baking
          Nut crusted salmon filets on baking sheet with different nut crusts before baking

          4. Bake the salmon

          Pop the pan in the oven at 425°F and bake for 12-15 minutes, or until the fish flakes easily with a fork and reaches an internal temp of 145°F.

          Nut crusted salmon filets on baking sheet with different nut crusts after baking
          Nut crusted salmon on fork

          Can you use individual salmon filets?

          Yes! You'll follow the same instructions is using individual filets. This is perfect is making 1 to 2 smaller servings for a sheet pan dinner. Keep in mind, since these are smaller pieces, you may need to cook the salmon a couple minutes shorter to avoid overcooking.

          Nut crusted salmon filets on baking sheet with nut crust

          Can you air fry this salmon?

          I have tested this once and it worked pretty well! You can air fry at 400ºF for ~8 to 10 minutes.

          Can you grill this salmon?

          Yes! I've tested this salmon on the grill and it turns out great too! Here's how to grill this nut-crusted salmon:

          1. Preheat the grill to medium heat (about 400 degrees).
          2. Brush a good amount of oil on the skin side of the salmon before placing on piece of foil. Make sure the foil is large enough to cover the salmon when wrapped.
          3. Next, spoon over the glaze and press nuts on top of the skinless side of the salmon.
          4. Then, wrap the salmon in the foil and place on the grill, skin side down.
          5. Cook for 12-15 minutes, or until the fish flakes easily with a fork.
          Grilled nut crusted salmon

          Recipe tips and tricks

          • Serving suggestions: This salmon pairs beautifully with roasted vegetables (tossed in any extra glaze!), a side of brown rice, or a fresh green salad. I also love finishing it off with a squeeze of lemon for a bright pop of flavor.
          • Troubleshooting: If your nuts start browning too quickly in the oven, loosely tent the salmon with foil for the last few minutes to prevent burning. If your salmon looks underdone, add 1-2 more minutes and check again-it should flake easily with a fork.
          • Scaling: Cooking for a crowd? Double the glaze and bake two salmon fillets side by side on the same sheet pan. You can also scale down by using just 1 or 2 small salmon portions and halving the glaze ingredients.

          Customize it your way

          • Nuts of your choice: Go all almond, blend a few kinds, or even try something unique like hazelnuts.
          • No dijon? Sub in whole grain mustard or spicy brown.
          • Make it gluten-free: This recipe is naturally gluten-free-just double-check your mustard!
          Chopped walnuts, pistachios, and almonds in separate bowls

          What to serve with it

          Pair your nut crusted salmon with roasted veggies (like asparagus, zucchini, or sweet peppers), brown rice, or a simple side salad. A squeeze of lemon over the top really brings it to life.

          Nut crusted salmon on plate with salad and lemon slice
          Nut crusted salmon cut into

          Can you make it ahead?

          Totally. Whip up the honey glaze and store it in a mason jar in the freezer. When ready to use, thaw, glaze your salmon, top with nuts, and bake. The glaze keeps for up to 4 months frozen.

          Meal prep and storage

          Store leftover salmon in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days. Reheat gently or flake over salad greens for a delicious lunch the next day.

          Nut crusted salmon on plate with salad and lemon slice

          Want to watch this recipe in action?

          Watch how to make this nut-crusted salmon on my featured virtual news segment for FOX31 Denver!

          Nut Crusted Salmon 10
          Print Recipe
          4.81 from 21 votes

          Nut Crusted Salmon

          This simple nut crusted salmon takes just 5 minutes to whip up and is on the table in under 30 minutes! The honey mustard glaze topped with nuts is the perfect combination of sweet and savory.
          Prep Time5 minutes mins
          Cook Time20 minutes mins
          Total Time25 minutes mins
          Course: Main Dish Choices
          Keyword: easy, grill, healthy fats, nuts, salmon, sheet pan
          Servings: 4 servings
          Calories: 390kcal
          Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

          Equipment

          • Pistachios
          • Honey
          • Dijon Mustard
          • Nuts

          Ingredients

          • 3 tablespoons honey
          • 3 tablespoons dijon mustard
          • 1 tablespoon finely chopped fresh thyme or 1 teaspoon dried thyme
          • 1 tablespoon finely chopped fresh rosemary or 1 teaspoon dried rosemary
          • ¼ teaspoon salt
          • ⅛ teaspoon black pepper
          • ½ cup nuts of your choice, coarsely chopped, (walnuts, almonds, pecans, pistachios, or a mixture)
          • 1 to 1 ½ pounds salmon or about 4 salmon filets
          • Lemon wedges, optional
          instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

          Instructions

          • Preheat oven to 425 degrees and line a sheet pan with foil or parchment paper. Place salmon on prepared sheet pan.
          • In a small bowl mix together honey, dijon mustard, thyme, rosemary, salt, and pepper.
          • Spoon the honey glaze evenly over the salmon until completely coated but not running off of the salmon. (You may end up with some extra glaze. You can save this for drizzling over the salmon at the end or toss with vegetables and olive oil for roasting - see note below.)
          • Press chopped nuts on top of the glazed salmon.
          • Bake salmon for 12-15 minutes, or until fish flakes easily with a fork. Serve with lemon wedges on the side, if desired.
          • Store any leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to two days.

          Video

          Notes

          Salmon Note: You can use a whole salmon filet or individual portions-both work great! If you're using smaller fillets, just keep an eye on the cook time. They may need a couple minutes less to prevent overcooking.
          Roasting Vegetables: I often like to add vegetables on the same sheet pan to roast with the salmon. Toss any veggies you have on hand with a little bit of olive oil, salt, pepper, and any of the leftover honey glaze to roast. Try any quick-cooking vegetables like small florets of broccoli, cauliflower, asparagus, zucchini, yellow squash, cherry tomatoes, sweet peppers, or a combination.
          Nutrition Note: This is an estimate provided by an online nutrition calculator. Nutrition may vary depending on ingredients used. This calculation is for almond nuts. This calculation does not include any side dishes. For more nutrition information, seek a professional registered dietitian's advice.

          Nutrition

          Serving: 1serving | Calories: 390kcal | Carbohydrates: 18g | Protein: 29g | Fat: 23g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 20g | Cholesterol: 70mg | Sodium: 490mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 14g

          Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

          In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

          Try these other healthy salmon recipes:

          • Honey Soy Glazed Salmon
          • Berry BBQ Salmon
          • Salmon with Kale and Golden Beets
          • Air Fryer Salmon Bites with Bang Bang Sauce

          save this nut crusted salmon recipe on pinterest:

          Nut crusted salmon 30 minute dinner

          Strawberry Smoothie Bowl

          March 8, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

          This strawberry smoothie bowl is completely customizable and super easy to blend together. Plus, it's packed with beneficial nutrients like antioxidants, protein, and fiber! This smoothie bowl tastes exactly like angel food cake.

          Strawberry smoothie bowl topped with fresh strawberries and granola

          Disclosure: This post has been sponsored by Naked Nutrition. All opinions are my own; I never feature a brand that I don't love! 

          Table of Contents

          • What is a smoothie bowl?
          • Is protein powder healthy?
          • What recipes can I use protein powder in?
            • Is super reds fruit powder healthy?
          • How do you make this strawberry bowl?
            • 1. Gather your ingredients
            • 2. Blend everything together 
            • 3. Pour into a bowl and add toppings
          • Smoothie bowl tips and tricks
          • Customize this strawberry smoothie bowl your way
            • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

            What is a smoothie bowl?

            A smoothie bowl is a nutritious breakfast or snack that consists of a thick smoothie poured into a bowl and topped with various toppings such as fruits, nuts, seeds, and granola. Unlike a regular smoothie that is sipped through a straw, a smoothie bowl is meant to be eaten with a spoon, allowing you to savor each bite and eat slower. 

            For this smoothie bowl, we're combining a base of frozen bananas and strawberries with nutrient-packed additions like protein powder, berry fruit powder, and yogurt. 

            Is protein powder healthy?

            Protein is essential for muscle growth and repair. Plus, research shows getting enough protein can help you feel full longer. If you're someone who struggles to get enough throughout the day, protein powders are a super helpful option. 

            As a dietitian, I love using Naked Nutrition's line of powders because they contain high quality ingredients without added fillers. For example, the Naked Nutrition Vanilla Whey Protein Powder I'm using for this recipe contains whey protein, coconut sugar, and natural flavor-that's it! This recipe calls for just 1 scoop, but feel free to add 2 scoops to pump up the protein.

            If you're not a fan of whey protein or following a vegan diet, they also have a ton of vegan options like pea, seed, and rice powders.

            Protein powders next to strawberry bowl

            What recipes can I use protein powder in?

            You can enjoy protein powder mixed with milk or added to recipes. Here's some creative ones to try:

            • Pumpkin Spice Protein Shake
            • Stirred into overnight oats
            • Chocolate Chip Protein Mug Cake
            • Mixed into pancake batter
            • Lemon Blueberry Mug Cake
            • Sprinkled over a bowl of cereal
            • Chocolate protein balls
            • Stirred into peanut butter Cereal Bars
            • Or blended into this delicious strawberry smoothie bowl!
            Pink smoothie bowl topped with strawberries
            Strawberry Smoothie Bowl 5

            Is super reds fruit powder healthy?

            For this recipe, I'm also using Naked Nutrition's Super Reds Fruit Powder made with a blend of the following fruits: Apple, Blueberry, Maqui, Cranberry Elderberry, Strawberry, Raspberry, Blackberry, Acai, Dragon Fruit, and Pomegranate. 

            This is a great supplement to pump up the vitamins, minerals, and antioxidants in your day. Each scoop contains just 35 calories while packing in 4 grams of dietary fiber. 

            How do you make this strawberry bowl?

            This beautiful pink strawberry smoothie bowl is whipped together in no time. Here's how to make it.

            1. Gather your ingredients

            For this recipe, strawberries are the star. Strawberries are packed with antioxidants, which help protect the cells in our body from damage. They're also a great source of vitamin C, which helps support the immune system. 

            Smoothie bowl ingredients on wooden platter

            2. Blend everything together 

            I like to use the Ninja Smoothie Bowl Maker to make this process seamless, but you can also use a regular blender too. If using a regular blender, you may need to add a bit more milk or mix with a spoon in between a few rounds of blending.

            Blending ingredients
            Blending ingredients
            Thick smoothie bowl

            3. Pour into a bowl and add toppings

            Now's time for the fun part! Add to your favorite bowl and top with anything you like. I like topping with more fresh strawberries. I find that the flavor of this bowl tastes exactly like angel food cake with a light whipped topping and strawberries - YUM!

            Strawberry Smoothie Bowl 3Strawberry Smoothie Bowl 8

            Smoothie bowl tips and tricks

            • Use ripe fruit - Make sure your strawberries and bananas are ripe before freezing. This will lend a sweeter, more desirable flavor.
            • Freeze your fruit solid - Freeze chopped fruit at least overnight or as long as possible so it's super hard before blending. This will give you a thicker bowl.
            • Prep ahead of time - To save time in the morning, I always like to measure out frozen ingredients in baggies. You can also put all your other ingredients in the blender in the fridge. Then in the morning, you can just add your frozen fruit and blend.

            Customize this strawberry smoothie bowl your way

            Like all of my other recipes, this smoothie bowl is completely customizable. You get to make the Cheerful Choice with what ingredients you use!

            • Protein powder of choice - For this recipe, we are using vanilla whey powder, but feel free to use another type of protein like soy, pea, seed, or rice. Naked Nutrition has so many different options for all dietary preferences!
            • Milk of your choice - There's all kinds of different milk options nowadays. Use whichever one you tend to keep in your fridge.
            • Yogurt of your choice - Although I have it written as plain nonfat Greek yogurt, feel free to use your favorite yogurt.
            • Nut butter of your choice - Use whatever you have on hand. If you have a nut allergy, feel free to swap for a seed butter or omit.
            • Toppings of your choice - Anything goes here! Some ideas you might try are more strawberries, bananas, granola, toasted coconut flakes, hemp seeds, chia seeds, or more nut butter.
            Topping strawberry smoothie bowl with granola

            Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

            In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

            Strawberry Smoothie Bowl 7
            Print Recipe
            4.75 from 4 votes

            Strawberry Smoothie Bowl

            This strawberry smoothie bowl is completely customizable and super easy to blend together. Plus, it's packed with beneficial nutrients like antioxidants, protein, and fiber!
            Prep Time5 minutes mins
            Total Time5 minutes mins
            Course: Breakfast Choices
            Servings: 1 smoothie bowl
            Calories: 385kcal
            Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

            Equipment

            • Naked Nutrition Vanilla Whey Protein Powder
            • Naked Nutrition Super Reds Fruit Powder

            Ingredients

            Smoothie Bowl Ingredients:

            • 1 large ripe banana, sliced and frozen (about 1 heaping cup)
            • ½ cup sliced strawberries, frozen
            • 1 scoop Naked Nutrition Vanilla Whey Protein Powder
            • 1 scoop Naked Nutrition Super Reds Fruit Powder
            • ¼ cup plain nonfat Greek yogurt
            • 1 tablespoon nut butter of your choice (cashew butter, peanut butter, almond butter, or can use a type of seed butter)
            • 3 tablespoons milk of your choice (almond milk, oat milk, dairy milk, soy milk, etc.)
            • 1 pitted Medjool date , this is optional but add if you prefer a sweeter smoothie bowl

            Topping Choices:

            • Sliced strawberries
            • Sliced bananas
            • Granola
            • Toasted coconut flakes
            • Hemp seeds
            • Chia seeds
            • More nut butter
            instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

            Instructions

            • Add all smoothie ingredients to your blender or food processor and secure the lid on.
            • Blend on high speed until ingredients are completely broken down and smooth.
            • Use a spatula to spoon mixture into a bowl, then add over toppings of your choice.

            Video

            Nutrition

            Serving: 1smoothie bowl | Calories: 385kcal | Carbohydrates: 56g | Protein: 24g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 60mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 29g

            Want more? Try these other smoothie bowl recipes:

            • Peanut Butter Smoothie Bowl
            • Dragon Fruit Smoothie Bowl
            • Matcha Smoothie Bowl
            • 5 Smoothie Bowls on Naked Nutrition

            save this strawberry smoothie bowl recipe on pinterest:

            Pinterest-Strawberry Smoothie Bowl

            13 Tips for a Sustainable Kitchen

            February 23, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

            With Earth Month coming up in April, we're thinking about all the ways we can help preserve our beautiful planet. We've compiled 13 tips that will help you reduce waste starting from your trip to the store all the way through shopping, cooking, cleaning, and storing!

            (This post is written by Cheerful Choices contributors, Corrin Coons and Sydney Coons.)

            13 sustainable kitchen tips

            Disclosure: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. Thanks so much for your support! See my disclosure policy for more details.

            How can I make my kitchen more eco-friendly?

            Changes can be made throughout the whole food preparation process to help reduce waste, save energy, and create a more eco-friendly kitchen. These areas include: 

            1. Shopping 
            2. Cooking
            3. Cleaning
            4. Storing 

            Sustainable Shopping Tips

            Help create a sustainable kitchen before food even enters your door by following these easy sustainable shopping tips!

            Tip #1: Plan Your Meals

            If you plan what meals you'll eat throughout the week before you head to the store you can ensure you're buying only what you need. This can reduce food waste which saves you money and helps the environment - so it's a win-win!  Need help planning out your meals? Check out our Coaching + Cooking program where we can provide a full 7-day personalized meal plan.

            Tip #2: Shop Local When Possible

            When you're able to, shop at your local farmers market. This reduces the distance food has to travel from where it's produced, helping lower fuel use and harmful emissions. 

            In fact, one study found that conventionally sourced food used 4 to 17 times as much fuel and emitted 5 to 17 times as much carbon dioxide when compared to locally sourced food. 

            Holding up bag that says fresh and local

            Tip #3: Buy "Ugly" Produce

            Don't waste those misshapen carrots or slightly bruised potatoes! When they're chopped up in a stir fry or stirred into vegetable soup no one will know what they looked like at the store. Buying those "ugly" fruits and vegetables can help reduce food waste and may even save you money if they're in a discounted section.

            There's even low cost subscription services like Misfits Market or Imperfect Foods that deliver "ugly" produce straight to your door!

            Tip #4: Buy from the Bulk Section

            Not only can buying in bulk save you money and reduce trips to the store, it can also reduce plastic waste. So next time you're at the store-stock up on staples like grains, dried beans, nuts, and seeds. 

            Tip #5: Use Reusable Tote Bags and Produce Bags

            Americans use 14 billion plastic bags a year so it's no surprise plastic bag bans have been on the rise with 8 states in the U.S currently banning plastic bags and many more cities imposing fees. Whether there's a ban in your state or not, you can do your part to reduce plastic waste by switching to reusable bags.

            Reusable tote bags have lots of benefits over plastic bags beyond just reducing plastic pollution. For one, they're bigger and sturdier than plastic bags which can prevent your freshly purchased groceries from ending up sprawled throughout the parking lot (admit it, this has happened to you at least once). Also, their size often leads to less trips when carrying groceries in. 

            Reusable produce bags are another great way to reduce plastic waste when shopping.

            Lotus Sustainables has lots of great options for reusable trolley bags and produce bags! Plus, I love that they have insulated bags to help keep foods cold.   

            Reusable produce bags

            Sustainable Cooking Tips

            Once you get back from the store, follow these tips to reduce food waste and promote a sustainable kitchen!

            Tip #6: Save Energy while Cooking

            Use only the size burner you need for what you're cooking. Using a smaller pot or pan on a smaller burner can help save energy. 

            You can also save energy by leaving the oven door open after cooking to help heat your house in the winter.  

            Tip #7: Use Scraps from Produce

            Produce scraps leftover from chopping veggies can be composted or used to make homemade veggie stock. 

            Tip #8: Cook with the whole food

            Here are some ways to use the whole fruit and veggie:

            • Use leftover fruit peels to infuse beverages like water or tea. 
            • Add strawberry tops or celery leaves to smoothie bowls - you won't even be able to taste them! 
            • Use broccoli stems in soups, roast them, or spiralize them into noodles. 
            • Carrot tops can be used like parsley in most recipes, added to salads, or made into carrot top soup. 
            • If you're wondering what to do with fruit and veggie scraps, a simple search online pulls up tons of helpful recipes, so get creative and have fun!
            Homemade vegetable broth

            Tip #9: Use Up Your Leftovers

            A lot of energy, resources, and money went into getting food on your plate, so do your best to use up any leftovers you have. You can do this by having a "leftover night" in your house to clean out the fridge. Along with reducing food waste, this allows you to experiment and have fun putting new meals together!

            If you're not sure what to do with your leftovers, check out this leftovers guide for tips on how to reuse all types of leftovers from cooked vegetables to leftover sauces and dips. 

            Sustainable Cleaning Tips

            Follow these tips when cleaning up after a delicious meal to help preserve resources and make your kitchen more sustainable. 

            Tip #10: Use Reusable Paper Towels and Rags

            Since paper towels are single-use, purchasing reusable paper towels and rags is an easy way to reduce the amount of paper waste generated when cleaning. Plus, you'll save money not having to buy a roll of paper towels every time you go to the store!

            Tip #11: Clean Dishes Effectively 

            Try to clean dishes right away so they're easier to clean and use less water. 

            If you only have a few dishes to wash, wash them by hand using soapy water filled up in the sink rather than running water. However, if you have lots of dishes it actually uses less water to pack your dishwasher full and use it instead. 

            Sustainable Storing Tips

            Whether you're storing food before cooking it or saving leftovers for later, follow these tips to store food sustainably. 

            Tip #12: Use Food Huggers and Silicone Bags

            Plastic wrap and plastic bags are commonly used to store food, but these are single-use plastics that can be easily swapped out for reusable alternatives:

            • Food Huggers function just like plastic wrap to keep food fresh but without the hassle of getting stuck or folded, and they can be used over and over. 
            • Silicone Stasher bags can be used instead of plastic bags to store food or pack your lunch in. They can then be easily cleaned and reused! They can also withstand heat, sous vide, and freezing.
            Food huggers

            Tip #13: Store Foods Correctly to Reduce Food Waste

            Know what foods should be stored in the fridge versus on the counter. Here are some basic tips to keep in mind: 

            • Bread stales faster in the fridge, so consider keeping it in your pantry or freeze extras. 
            • Lemons and limes last longest when stored in the crisper drawer of the fridge. 
            • Keep herbs like cilantro and parsley in a glass jar in some water to make them last longer.
            • Store greens with a paper towel on top to collect excess moisture.
            • Berries about to go bad? Freeze them to use in a smoothie or dessert bake later. 

            When storing food it's also helpful to label it with the date it must be used by. This makes it easier to see which foods should be used first and ensures leftovers are used up in time. A general rule of thumb is to throw out refrigerated leftovers within 3 to 4 days and frozen foods after 3 to 4 months. 

            Key Takeaways

            As you can see, there are many strategies you can use at various steps in the shopping, cooking, cleaning, and storing process to help make your kitchen more sustainable! But remember, eco-friendly practices take time to implement, so start slow. Make it a goal to implement 1 or 2 at a time. 

            We hope these tips help you show your appreciation for our planet and celebrate Earth Month!

            save this sustainable kitchen guide on pinterest:

            Sustainable Kitchen Tips - save on Pinterest!

            Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

            In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

            Corrin and Sydney

            Bio: Corrin and Sydney are both Registered-Dietitians-to-be from Westminster, Colorado who are passionate about helping others through food and nutrition. They are both currently Food Science and Human Nutrition majors at Colorado State University looking to graduate in 2023 and pursue their Masters in Dietetics. In their free time, Sydney and Corrin enjoy backpacking in the Colorado mountains, doing yoga, and cooking new recipes. They love sharing their passion for food with others and providing food inspiration on their Instagram page. You can connect with them on Instagram @nutri.liciouseats!

            Southwest Quinoa Salad

            February 7, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

            This flavorful Southwest Quinoa Salad is a quick and nutritious meal-perfect to meal prep ahead of time for lunch or dinner. This colorful salad combines pantry ingredients like canned tomatoes and beans alongside fresh chopped veggies and fluffy quinoa. Plus, you get to add any toppings of your choice!

            Colorful southwest quinoa salad topped with avocado

            Disclosure: This post has been sponsored by Pacific Coast Producers. All opinions are my own; I never feature a brand that I don't love!

            Table of Contents

            • What is quinoa salad?
              • Can I use another grain other than quinoa?
            • Are canned foods healthy?
            • How do you make Southwest Quinoa Salad?
              • 1. Cook the quinoa
              • Here are some helpful tips and tricks when cooking quinoa
              • 2. Add your other ingredients
              • 3. Drizzle over dressing
              • 4. Add any toppings of your choice
            • Can I make it ahead of time? 

              What is quinoa salad?

              Quinoa salad is a healthy dish consisting of a base of fresh cooked quinoa topped with a variety of nourishing ingredients and some type of vinaigrette or sauce. There's tons of different flavor variations like sesame ginger, mediterranean, or southwest.

              Quinoa is a great source of protein alongside fiber, magnesium, and potassium. 

              Can I use another grain other than quinoa?

              We've also tested this recipe using rolled oats for a savory oats variation! In this case, you can substitute the 1 cup raw quinoa for 1 cup raw rolled oats. You could also try swapping for other grains like farro, brown rice, or barley.

              Canned tomatoes
              Ingredients on white backdrop

              Are canned foods healthy?

              Canned fruits and vegetables are affordable, sustainable, and nutrient-dense. Canned produce if often thought to be less healthy, but this couldn't be farther from the truth. Canned fruits and vegetables are actually canned at peak ripeness to lock in the flavor and nutrients. This means canned produce has the same or higher amounts of nutrients as fresh or frozen produce.

              For this recipe, canned tomatoes are a star ingredient. Not only are they super convenient with no cutting needed-they're also packed with vitamins and minerals. Canned tomatoes are filled with vitamins A and C, which are important for maintaining healthy skin, eyes, and immune system. They're also rich in a type of antioxidant called lycopene. In fact, 1 cup of canned tomatoes has 6641 mcg of lycopene compared to 4630 mcg in 1 cup of fresh tomatoes. 

              For this recipe we are using a 15-ounce can of tomatoes, but feel free to use a 28-ounce can if you like a more tomato-forward salad. You could also swap regular diced canned tomatoes for fire roasted tomatoes which have a smokey, caramelized flavor.

              Gold spoon in quinoa salad

              How do you make Southwest Quinoa Salad?

              This healthy Southwest Quinoa Salad is a delicious and healthy meal that's perfect for lunch or dinner. It's also super easy to make and comes together in no time.

              1. Cook the quinoa

              We like to make fresh quinoa but you can skip this step and buy store bought cooked quinoa packets. We recommend grabbing about 2 packets to have enough quinoa.

              If you're trying to prep things ahead of time, we like to cook the quinoa, cool, and store in the fridge until ready to make the rest of the salad. 

              Here are some helpful tips and tricks when cooking quinoa

              • Rinse the quinoa: Rinsing in a fine mesh strainer removes the naturally occurring coating called saponin, which can make the quinoa taste bitter.
              • Cook with the right ratio of liquid: We like to use about 1 ¾ cups of liquid for 1 cup of quinoa. This helps the quinoa cook evenly without becoming mushy.
              • Cook the quinoa covered: After bringing the quinoa and liquid to a boil, reduce the heat to low and cover the saucepan. This will help the quinoa absorb the liquid and get nice and fluffy. Avoid lifting the lid during cooking, as this can release steam and slow down the cooking process.
              Fresh cooked quinoa

              2. Add your other ingredients

              Once the quinoa is cooked and chilled, you'll add your other ingredients. If you're in a pinch and don't have fresh cilantro, you can substitute 2 tablespoons of dried cilantro. Leave out the avocado until the end to avoid smashing it.

              Colorful ingredients in large white bowl

              3. Drizzle over dressing

              For this vinaigrette, we are combining bold flavors like tangy lime juice and southwest seasonings like cumin and chili powder. The cilantro adds a nice freshness to the salad, but you can swap for dried cilantro if needed. 

              We recommend blending for a creamier consistency, but you can also just give it a good stir before pouring over.

              If you don't feel like making homemade dressing, you can also purchase a cilantro lime dressing in store.

              Lime dressing ingredients
              Pouring homemade lime dressing ingredients over southwestern salad

              4. Add any toppings of your choice

              Like all of my other recipes, this southwestern quinoa salad is completely customizable. You get to choose any toppings you want to use. This is a great way to use up any ingredients on hand. 

              • Protein additions like cooked chicken, shrimp, roasted chickpeas, or crispy tofu
              • Cheese like crumbled feta, goat cheese, queso fresco, or shredded mexican cheese
              • Fresh diced mango
              • Toasted sliced almonds
              • Roasted sweet potato cubes
              • Chopped romaine lettuce or kale
              • Tortilla chips
              • Sour cream or plain greek yogurt

              Can I make it ahead of time? 

              Feel free to make this recipe ahead of time and store in the fridge for up to 3 days until ready to eat.

              This makes it a great dish to prep for a busy weeknight meal. It's also perfect to bring to potlucks and parties to add a colorful,  healthy meal into the mix.

              Southwestern quinoa salad with canned tomatoes

              Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

              In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

              Southwest Quinoa Salad Square
              Print Recipe
              4.75 from 4 votes

              Southwest Quinoa Salad

              This flavorful Southwest Quinoa Salad is a quick and nutritious meal-perfect to meal prep ahead of time for lunch or dinner. Plus, you get to add any toppings of your choice!
              Prep Time10 minutes mins
              Cook Time20 minutes mins
              Additional Time30 minutes mins
              Total Time1 hour hr
              Course: Main Dish Choices
              Cuisine: Mexican
              Keyword: meal prep quinoa salad, southwest quinoa salad, southwestern salad
              Servings: 6 servings (makes 10 cups)
              Calories: 350kcal
              Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

              Equipment

              • Diced Tomatoes
              • Diced Black Beans

              Ingredients

              Salad Ingredients:

              • 1 cup dry quinoa, pre-rinsed (about 4 cups cooked)
              • 1 ¾ cups water or vegetable broth
              • 1 - 15 ounce can diced tomatoes liquid drained in a colander
              • 1 - 15 ounce can canned black beans, drained and rinsed
              • 1 orange pepper, diced (about 1 cup)
              • ½ small red onion, diced (about ½ cup)
              • ½ cup fresh cilantro, chopped
              • ½ cup canned corn or thawed frozen corn
              • 1 large avocado, diced

              Dressing Ingredients:

              • 4 tablespoons lime juice, 2 small limes
              • 4 tablespoons cilantro, minced
              • 3 tablespoons olive oil
              • 1 tablespoon honey
              • 2 teaspoons ground cumin
              • 1 teaspoon chili powder
              • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
              • Salt and pepper to taste

              Optional Toppings of your choice:

              • Protein additions of your choice (such as cooked chicken, shrimp, roasted chickpeas, or crispy tofu)
              • Cheese of your choice (such as crumbled feta, goat cheese, queso fresco, or shredded mexican cheese)
              • Fresh diced mango
              • Toasted sliced almonds
              • Roasted sweet potato cubes
              • Chopped romaine lettuce or kale
              • Tortilla chips
              • Sour cream or plain greek yogurt
              instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

              Instructions

              • Add quinoa to a medium pot over medium-high heat. Let dry quinoa toast for 2-3 minutes, then pour over water or broth. Let liquid come to a boil, then reduce to low heat and put the lid on. Let simmer for 15 minutes until fluffy and cooked through. Once the quinoa is cooked: remove it from the heat, transfer to a large bowl, and let cool completely.*
              • To the same large bowl, add tomatoes, black beans, diced pepper, red onion, cilantro, corn, and stir to combine. 
              • In a small bowl or food processor, whisk together lime juice, cilantro, olive oil, honey, cumin, chili powder, garlic powder, salt, and pepper. Pour dressing over quinoa salad and gently stir to incorporate the dressing throughout the quinoa. 
              • Gently fold in diced avocado at the end.
              • Then in true Cheerful Choices manner… serve with any optional toppings of your choice to give it your own flare!
              • You can store this salad in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.

              Notes

              *Meal prep tip: You can make this quinoa ahead of time and store in the fridge until ready to make. 
              February is Canned Foods Month and for this recipe we are using canned tomatoes as a convenient, affordable option. Read above to learn more about the benefits of canned fruits and veggies!

              Nutrition

              Serving: 1serving (about 1.5 cups) | Calories: 350kcal | Carbohydrates: 51g | Protein: 12g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 350mg | Fiber: 13g | Sugar: 8g

              Want more? Try these other canned tomato recipes

              • Bruschetta Trio
              • Afghan Bean Curry
              • Homemade Tomato Soup & Grilled Cheese
              • Tikka Masala

              save this southwest quinoa salad recipe on pinterest:

              Save this quinoa salad on pinterest

              Sheet Pan Pancakes with Blueberries

              February 3, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 4 Comments

              Sheet pan pancakes are a simple and delicious way to enjoy pancakes without the mess. These heart shaped pancakes are made with oat flour and blueberries for a heart-healthy breakfast. Perfect for Valentine's Day and Heart Month-this festive pancake bake is sure to become a new favorite.

              Heart shaped pancake bake

              Disclosure: This post has been sponsored by The U.S. Highbush Blueberry Council. All opinions are my own; I never feature a brand that I don't love! 

              Table of Contents

              • What are sheet pan pancakes?
              • Are these sheet pan pancakes healthy?
                • Benefits of blueberries
                • Benefits of oat flour
                • Benefits of flaxseed
              • How do you make sheet pan pancakes?
                • 1. Gather your ingredients
                • 2. Mix together batter
                • 3. Pour into pan
                • 4. Bake until cooked through
                • Other tips and tricks
              • Customize it your way
              • Choose toppings of your choice
              • Can you make sheet pancakes ahead of time?
              • Make these heart shaped pancakes for Valentine's Day
                • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

                What are sheet pan pancakes?

                Sheet pan pancakes are similar to the classic stack but instead of making individual pancakes, you'll simply bake all the batter together in a pan. Once it's baked, you can slice into squares and serve.

                Here we are using a fun 8" heart-shaped pan that's perfect for Valentine's Day. However, you can also just use a regular 8x8" pan. 

                Are these sheet pan pancakes healthy?

                These pancakes call for simple and nourishing ingredients including blueberries, oat flour, and ground flaxseed. Learn more about why these ingredients are beneficial for our health, especially our heart. 

                Stack of blueberry pancakes topped with fresh blueberries

                Benefits of blueberries

                Blueberries are one of our favorites! For this pancake bake, fresh blueberries add a pop of flavor, color, and nutrients, but you can also use frozen blueberries in this recipe too - more on that later. Pro tip: I always keep frozen blues stashed in my freezer so I have a flavorful and nutritious snack at the ready -- no extra grocery trip required.

                Fresh blueberries are a good source of vitamin C and an excellent source of vitamin K and manganese. They also contain phytonutrients like "anthocyanins," a type of pigment which gives these berries their bright blue hue. 

                A growing body of scientific evidence shows blueberries can be considered a heart-healthy fruit. For example, blueberries are a good source of dietary fiber (4 grams per 1 cup serving), which can help to promote overall heart health. And according to the Dietary Guidelines for Americans, a healthy dietary pattern which includes a higher intake of fruits, is associated with a reduced risk of many chronic diseases, including heart disease.

                Want more information on the blueberry heart health connection? Take this quiz to find a heart-healthy blueberry recipe tailored to you!

                Benefits of oat flour

                Oat flour is simply rolled oats that have been blended into a fine powder. You can buy oat flour in store or even make your own at home.

                Oats are a type of whole grain, filled with satiating protein and fiber. Research has also shown that oats may play a role in reducing the risk of heart disease. To get a bit science-y, oats contain something called "beta-glucan" which may help lower LDL ("bad") cholesterol levels.

                Plus, oat flour is gluten-free, making it a good alternative to traditional all-purpose flour. If you have celiac disease, always be sure to still check the label for the GF certification as some oat flours may be processed in facilities that handle gluten.

                Benefits of flaxseed

                Flaxseed is a rich source of omega-3 fats, which have been linked to various heart health benefits.We love adding flaxseed to everything from granola to 1-minute mug cakes!

                How do you make sheet pan pancakes?

                Regular flapjacks are fun but pancakes in a pan are even better because they're fuss-free. You don't have to worry about making in batches or getting batter everywhere. Instead, follow these simple steps to perfect this blueberry bake.

                Ingredients on white marble

                1. Gather your ingredients

                Before starting, round up all the ingredients you need to make these pancakes. We also recommend looking at the topping options-make sure you have something fun to add on top!

                Batter in a white bowl

                2. Mix together batter

                We like to mix the ingredients separately then add the wet into the dry for the most consistent batter. But honestly, you could get away with just throwing everything into one bowl, we won't tell.

                Batter poured in heart pan

                3. Pour into pan

                If you want to make heart shaped pancakes, add your batter into a festive heart shaped pan. This recipe makes a small batch of batter so be sure to use a spatula to get every last drop out.

                Blueberry syrup drizzled over sheet pan pancakes

                4. Bake until cooked through

                You'll only need 15 minutes before popping these sheet pan pancakes out of the oven. Just enough time to clean up and prep your toppings while it's baking!

                Other tips and tricks

                • Spooning out the oat flour - We recommend spooning the oat flour into a measuring cup before leveling out. This ensures the oat flour doesn't get too compact. If you're unsure of the amount, try using a kitchen scale to weigh out the flour to 120 grams.
                • Batter consistency - The batter should be somewhat fluid but not overly dry. If you're finding the batter too liquidy, mix in a spoonful of flour. If you're finding the batter too dry, add a splash of milk.
                • Blueberries - We like to use fresh blueberries for this recipe to make sure the pancake bake doesn't get soggy. If you're using frozen blueberries, be sure to let them thaw completely before using them in the recipe.

                Customize it your way

                Like all of my other recipes, this pancake bake is completely customizable. You get to choose what ingredients and toppings you want to use.

                • Milk of your choice - Use whatever you have on hand or prefer to fit your dietary needs.
                • Liquid sweetener - We like to use maple syrup but honey, agave syrup, and date syrup are also good options.
                • Oat flour - If you don't have oat flour on hand or don't like the taste, feel free to swap for regular flour or your favorite gluten-free flour blend.
                • Egg - Eggs can be hard to come by nowadays! If you don't have an egg or are vegan, feel free to swap for a "flax egg". 
                Toppings of your choice

                Choose toppings of your choice

                Pancakes are the perfect vessel for a variety of fun and flavorful toppings. Choose your favorites or ALL of them!

                • More blueberries
                • Homemade blueberry maple syrup
                • Chia seed jam
                • Yogurt
                • Toasted coconut
                • Chocolate chips
                • Creamy nut butter
                • Chopped nuts like toasted sliced almonds, honey roasted pistachios, or chopped walnuts
                • Seeds like hemp seeds, chia seeds, or more ground flaxseed
                • Sliced bananas
                Drizzling syrup onto sheet pancakes

                Can you make sheet pancakes ahead of time?

                You can add the batter to your pan and store in the fridge for up to 24 hours. This means it's perfect to make ahead of time and enjoy for breakfast the next day. The recipe feeds about four, but you can always double the recipe and use a larger pan.

                You can also store any leftover cooked pancakes in the fridge for 3-5 days. That means they're ideal for meal prep! Simply microwave for 30 seconds to reheat.

                Make these heart shaped pancakes for Valentine's Day

                This recipe is perfect for both Valentine's Day and Heart Month. These sheet pan pancakes are a nutritious and delicious way to celebrate! You can even serve it on a cute tray to enjoy with your loved ones.

                Valentine's Day Pancake Tray

                Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

                In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

                Blueberry Pancake Bake 13 scaled
                Print Recipe
                4.84 from 6 votes

                Blueberry Sheet Pan Pancakes

                Sheet pan pancakes are a delicious way to enjoy pancakes without the mess. These heart shaped pancakes are made with oat flour and blueberries for a heart-healthy breakfast.
                Prep Time10 minutes mins
                Cook Time15 minutes mins
                Total Time25 minutes mins
                Course: Breakfast Choices
                Cuisine: American
                Keyword: blueberry pancakes, heart pancakes, sheet pan pancakes, sheet pancakes
                Servings: 4 servings
                Calories: 219kcal
                Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

                Ingredients

                Pancake Ingredients:

                • Cooking spray
                • 1 ¼ cup 120 grams oat flour, spooned and leveled into the measuring cup
                • 1 tablespoon ground flaxseed
                • 1 teaspoon baking powder
                • ¼ teaspoon salt
                • ½ cup milk of your choice (almond milk, dairy milk, soy milk, oat milk, etc.)
                • ¼ cup liquid sweetener of your choice (maple syrup, honey, agave, or date syrup)
                • 1 large egg
                • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
                • ½ cup fresh blueberries

                Toppings of your choice:

                • More fresh blueberries
                • Homemade blueberry maple syrup
                • Chia seed jam
                • Yogurt
                • Toasted coconut
                • Chocolate chips
                • Creamy nut butter
                • Chopped nuts of your choice (such as toasted sliced almonds, honey roasted pistachios, or chopped walnuts)
                • Seeds of your choice (such as hemp seeds, chia seeds, or more ground flaxseed)
                • Sliced bananas
                instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

                Instructions

                • Preheat your oven to 425°F. Grease a 8x8" square pan or 8" heart pan with cooking spray and set aside.
                • In a large mixing bowl, combine the oat flour, flaxseed, baking powder, and salt. 
                • In another mixing bowl or large liquid measuring cup, whisk together the milk, liquid sweetener, egg, and vanilla extract.
                • Pour the wet ingredients into the dry ingredients and stir until just combined. Gently fold in the blueberries.
                • Pour the batter onto your greased pan and use a spatula to smooth it out evenly.
                • Bake for 15 minutes, or until the top is dry to the touch and the center is cooked through. Once cooked, let cool for 5 minutes in the pan.
                • Then in true Cheerful Choices manner… slice and serve with more blueberries any toppings of your choice! 
                • Store any leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for 3-5 days.

                Video

                Notes

                Want to learn more about the benefits of blueberries? Read the blog post above!

                Nutrition

                Calories: 219kcal | Carbohydrates: 40g | Protein: 6.5g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 0.5g | Cholesterol: 45mg | Sodium: 310mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 14g

                Want more blueberry recipes? Try these:

                • Chickpea Edamame Salad with fresh blueberries
                • Chia Seed Jam made with fresh or frozen blueberries
                • 5 other heart-healthy recipes at blueberry.com

                save this sheet pancake recipe on pinterest:

                Pinterest Save Sheet Pan Pancakes

                Valentine's Charcuterie Board

                January 18, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 3 Comments

                Learn how to make the perfect Valentine's Charcuterie Board for your sweetheart, galentine, or family. This beautiful board is filled with all the good stuff like cheeses, meats, dips, fresh fruit, vegetables, and sweet treats. Read on for ways to customize and make this board your own!

                Valentine's Day Charcuterie Board

                This post was originally published February 8, 2021. It was updated on January 10, 2022.

                Disclosure: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. Thanks so much for your support! See my disclosure policy for more details.

                Charcuterie boards may also be referred to as a snack board or smorgasbord. It's essentially a platter filled with small bites of different, delicious foods. These boards aren't just reserved for special occasions or holidays- you can also make this type of snack board on other days. Or if you want to surprise your sweetheart with breakfast in bed, try this pancake charcuterie board!

                Table of Contents

                • How do you make a Valentine's Day Charcuterie Board?
                  • Cheese 
                  • Meat
                  • Dips and Jams
                  • Bread and Crackers
                  • Fruits and Vegetables 
                  • Chocolate and Extras

                How do you make a Valentine's Day Charcuterie Board?

                The great thing about charcuterie boards is it's totally customizable! You get to pick and choose which cheeses, meats, dips, fresh fruit, vegetables, and sweet treats you use. This is a great option if you want an elegant meal but only have random bits and pieces lying around.

                Ready to make your one-of-a-kind Valentine's Charcuterie board? Go through this list of foods and slowly fill your platter until it's full. You can use a large wooden block, a cutting board, or a serving tray to build your board.

                1. Cheese 

                A charcuterie board is only as good as its cheese. Add a variety of both soft and hard cheeses. I always like to go to my local cheese shop and ask for their recommendations. Here are some you might try.

                • Flavored goat cheese log (blueberry, cranberry, orange)
                • Cheddar 
                • Swiss
                • Brie
                • Parmesan
                • Gouda
                • Blue cheese
                • Mozzarella pearls
                • Cashew Milk Cheese (vegan)
                • Tofu and Coconut Oil Cheese (vegan)
                Colorful valentine's charcuterie display

                2. Meat

                Most charcuterie meats are some hue of pink or red-making them perfect for this valentine's charcuterie. If you're feeling extra festive, use a heart shaped cookie cutter to shape slices of cheese or meat. If you are vegetarian or vegan, you can leave the meat out or use a plant-based alternative.

                • Salami
                • Sopressata
                • Prosciutto
                • Summer sausage
                • Thinly sliced rope sausage
                • Lunch meats rolled up
                • Vegan meats

                3. Dips and Jams

                I love adding a bit of dip or jam on a cracker before topping it with cheese or meat. Don't be afraid to use a variety of both sweet and savory dips.

                • Hummus
                • Baba ganoush
                • Salsa
                • Greek yogurt ranch dip
                • Greek yogurt peanut butter dip
                • Jams - use red or purple colored jams
                • Homemade 2-ingredient chia seed jam
                • Hazelnut spread
                Raincoast crisp crackers on wooden board

                4. Bread and Crackers

                My favorite section! This is a great way to clean out your pantry and arrange all those opened cracker and chip bags. Choose whole grain products for a little extra fiber and nutrition boost if you'd like.

                • Raincoast Crisps
                • Rice cakes
                • Baguettes
                • Triscuits
                • Pita chips
                • Chia seed crackers
                • Tortilla chips
                • Pretzels
                • Nut Thins

                5. Fruits and Vegetables 

                Try to use mostly red, pink, and purple fruits and vegetables to add to the valentine's feel. Here are some to try adding.

                • Strawberries
                • Raspberries
                • Strawberries
                • Blueberries
                • Blackberries
                • Cherries
                • Grapes
                • Figs
                • Sliced apples
                • Dried cranberries
                • Raisins
                • Cherry tomatoes
                • Red pepper slices
                • Purple cauliflower
                • Purple or red rainbow carrots
                • Beets or beet chips

                6. Chocolate and Extras

                It's not Valentine's Day with a little extra sweets. Use any random bits of candy, chocolate, or baked goods you have on hand. It's so important to allow yourself the freedom of flexibility when it comes to food during special occasions and holidays. Aim to fit in nutritious, whole foods but also be sure to enjoy your favorite indulgent bites in moderation. It's all about creating a healthy balance.

                • Yogurt covered strawberries
                • Chocolate covered strawberries
                • Chocolate squares
                • Avocado truffles
                • Candied nuts
                • Lightly salted mixed nuts
                • Energy bites
                • Oreos
                • Rice Krispie treats
                • Edible protein cookie dough
                • Heart shaped cookies
                • Biscotti
                • Stuffed dates
                • 2Betties healthy donuts (included on my fall charcuterie board!)

                What are your favorite combos for this valentine's charcuterie board? Tag me on Instagram at @cheerfulchoices... I would love to see!

                Close up of small bites on charcuterie

                You can make Valentine's Day Charcuterie Cups too!

                If you love making charcuterie boards, charcuterie cups are a fun way to turn them into festive, individual portions! These are perfect for Galentine's parties, romantic date nights, or even as a fun snack idea for kids! View the guide on how to make them here!

                Valentines Charcuterie Cups
                Valentines Day Charcuterie Board 1
                Print Recipe
                5 from 7 votes

                Valentine's Charcuterie Board

                This customizable board is filled with all the good stuff like cheeses, meats, dips, fresh fruit, vegetables, and sweet treats. Perfect to make for your loved ones on Valentine's Day!
                Prep Time15 minutes mins
                Total Time15 minutes mins
                Course: Snack Choices
                Cuisine: American
                Keyword: charcuterie, cheese, dark chocolate, fruit, healthy, snack, valentines, vegetables
                Servings: 4 -6 servings
                Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

                Ingredients

                Cheeses of your choice

                • Blueberry goat cheese log
                • Cheddar
                • Swiss
                • Brie
                • Parmesan
                • Gouda
                • Blue cheese
                • Vegan cheeses

                Meats of your choice

                • Salami
                • Soppressata
                • Prosciutto
                • Summer sausage
                • Lunch meats rolled up
                • Vegan meats

                Dips of your choice

                • Hummus
                • Baba Ganoush
                • Salsa
                • Greek Yogurt Ranch Dip
                • Greek Yogurt Peanut Butter Dip
                • Jams - use red or purple colored jams
                • Homemade 2 Ingredient Chia Seed Jam
                • Hazelnut Spread

                Bread and Crackers of your choice

                • Raincoast Crisps
                • Rice cakes
                • Baguettes
                • Triscuits
                • Chia Seed Crackers
                • Pita Chips
                • Tortilla Chips
                • Pretzels
                • Nut Thins

                Fruits and Vegetables of your choice

                • Strawberries
                • Raspberries
                • Strawberries
                • Blueberries
                • Cherries
                • Grapes
                • Figs
                • Sliced Apples
                • Dried Cranberries
                • Raisins
                • Cherry Tomatoes
                • Red Pepper Slices
                • Purple Cauliflower
                • Purple or Red Rainbow Carrots
                • Beets or beet chips

                Chocolate and extras of your choice

                • Yogurt covered strawberries
                • Chocolate covered strawberries
                • Dark chocolate bar pieces
                • Biscottis
                • Truffles
                • Candied Nuts
                • Lightly Salted Mixed Nuts
                • Oreos
                • Rice Krispie treats
                • Heart Shaped Sugar Cookies
                • Nut Butter Stuffed Dates
                instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

                Instructions

                • Choose a board to use. This could be a wooden cutting board, baking sheet, or large platter.
                • Then, go through this list of foods and slowly fill your platter or board until it's full.
                • Enjoy with your sweetheart, galentine, or family!

                Video

                save this valentine's charcuterie board recipe on pinterest:

                Save this Valentine's Charcuterie Board on Pinterest

                Air Fryer Salmon Bites with Bang Bang Sauce

                January 18, 2023 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 2 Comments

                Air fryer salmon bites are super easy to make and turn out delicious every time! Perfect to enjoy as a healthy, high protein meal. For this recipe, the salmon bites are marinated and served with creamy bang bang sauce for extra flavor. You can easily make the sauce more or less spicy depending on your tastes!

                Crispy salmon bites with sliced green onions

                Disclosure: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. Thanks so much for your support! See my disclosure policy for more details.

                Table of Contents

                • What are salmon bites?
                • Is salmon healthy?
                • Do I have to use skinless salmon?
                • How do you make air fryer salmon bites?
                  • Air frying tips and tricks
                  • Can you make an air fried bang bang salmon fillet?
                  • What should I serve with salmon bites?
                  • Can you store leftovers?
                  • Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?
                    • save this salmon bites recipe on pinterest:
                    • Want more? Try these other salmon recipes:

                  What are salmon bites?

                  Salmon bites are created by cooking large 1-inch salmon cubes. They're a fun way to achieve a crispier texture and they cook even quicker than salmon filets. 

                  For this recipe, we've decided to air fry the salmon bites to achieve that beautiful char without adding any extra calories from oil or deep frying.

                  Did you know you can air fry just about anything? Try making crunchy chickpeas, teriyaki snap peas, or cheesy Brussels Sprouts in the air fryer too!

                  Gold fork taking salmon cube

                  Is salmon healthy?

                  As a dietitian, salmon is one of my favorite ingredients to develop recipes with! Salmon is a great source of protein, omega-3 fatty acids, and vitamins B12 and vitamin D. Here's a breakdown of what each nutrient is important for:

                  • Protein - helps us feel fuller longer and supports essential functions in the body like muscle growth, recovery, immune function
                  • Omega-3s - may help reduce risk of heart disease, lower blood pressure, and improve cognitive function
                  • Vitamin B12 - important for maintaining healthy nerves and red blood cells
                  • Vitamin D - essential for bone health, calcium absorption, and supports a healthy immune system

                  I like to buy ASC-certified salmon as this ensures salmon farms adhere to certain guidelines that help care for the natural environment and support local communities. You can use the ASC website to find products near you or keep an eye out for the teal ASC label!

                  Do I have to use skinless salmon?

                  This recipe calls for skinless salmon, but you could definitely keep the skin on too-it will get nice and crispy! Salmon skin has similar nutrients to the meaty part of the filet and actually has a higher concentration of omega-3s.

                  If you're not a fan of the salmon skin, you can buy skinless filets or carefully remove it with a sharp knife.

                  How do you make air fryer salmon bites?

                  These salmon bites come together in a matter of minutes. Here's how to make them.

                  Ingredients on white background
                  Sriracha bottle

                  First, mix together the bang bang sauce

                  Bang bang sauce is a creamy, spicy sauce that pairs perfectly with proteins like salmon, shrimp, and chicken. All you need is 5 pantry staples to make it: mayonnaise, sweet chili sauce, soy sauce, rice vinegar, garlic powder, and hot sauce. 

                  Our preferred hot sauce-and the typical hot sauce used for bang bang sauce-is Sriracha. However, sometimes it can be hard to find in stores due to the chili pepper shortage. If you can't get your hands on Sriracha or don't like the taste, you can use another hot sauce of your choice. Here are some other good options:

                  • Tabasco
                  • Tapatio
                  • Cholula
                  • Nando's Peri Peri
                  Salmon cubes marinating

                  Next, marinade the salmon

                  If you're short on time, you can skip this step. However, we prefer to marinade the salmon for about 30 minutes for maximum flavor. Try not to let it sit for more than 30 minutes or it can make the salmon overly soft.

                  Salmon bites before air frying
                  Salmon bites after air frying for 8-10 minutes

                  Finally, cook salmon bites for 8-10 minutes at 375ºF

                  We found that this temperature and time allows the salmon bites to get nice and golden brown without burning. If you find that after 10 minutes, you still see parts of the salmon that aren't golden, air fry for another 1-2 minutes to caramelize. 

                  Air frying tips and tricks

                  We found the following helpful tips and tricks when air frying the salmon bites:

                  • Preheat the air fryer before adding the salmon bites. You can do this by letting the air fryer heat at 375ºF for about 2 minutes.
                  • After preheating, we like to line our air fryer with a parchment sheet for easy clean up.
                  • When placing the salmon into the air fryer basket, use tongs so any excess marinade will drip off. 
                  • Don't overcrowd the basket or the salmon cubes won't brown properly.
                  • Keep an eye on the salmon bites while they are cooking, as cooking times may vary depending on the size of the bites.

                  Can you make an air fried bang bang salmon fillet?

                  Yes! I've experimented with this instead of the bites and it's just as delicious. Simply add your salmon fillet to a 375ºF preheated air fryer basket. Then, spoon over a generous amount of sauce as a glaze and brush it around so it coats the entire fillet. Then, just like with the salmon bites, cook for 8-12 minutes, until golden brown on top. I even like to have some little charred bits for extra flavor. Depending on the size of your fillet, you may have to cook it for slightly longer.

                  Bang Bang Salmon Filet
                  Bang Bang Salmon Filet 1

                  What should I serve with salmon bites?

                  To make these salmon bites into a satisfying meal, we recommend pairing with nourishing sides. Here's some ideas:

                  • Sauteed cauliflower rice 
                  • Vegetable fried rice (you can drizzle in extra bang bang sauce!)
                  • Steamed or air fried broccoli
                  • Turn into power bowl with grains, sliced cucumber, avocado, shredded carrots, and edamame
                  Salmon Bites

                  Can you store leftovers?

                  You can store leftover salmon bites in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. When reheating, we recommend air frying at 375ºF for about 3-4 minutes. This will bring the crispy texture back to life!

                  What if I have extra sauce?

                  If you end up with extra sauce, you can always drizzle it over vegetables or freeze it for later. I like to freeze in a small mason jar and label with the date I froze it.

                  Air fryer salmon bites served over rice

                  Can you make these salmon bites in the oven?

                  I haven't tested this recipe in the oven, but you could try baking salmon bites in the oven at 375ºF for about 15 minutes. Just note, you might not get the same caramelization as you would see when air frying. You achieve the similar golden brown char marks, you could try broiling in the oven for 1-2 minutes at the end.

                  Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

                  In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

                  Salmon Bites square
                  Print Recipe
                  4.80 from 10 votes

                  Air Fryer Salmon Bites

                  Air fryer salmon bites are a fancy yet healthy meal to make on repeat. Marinated and served with creamy bang bang sauce for extra flavor!
                  Prep Time10 minutes mins
                  Cook Time10 minutes mins
                  Total Time20 minutes mins
                  Course: Air Fryer
                  Cuisine: Asian
                  Keyword: air fryer salmon bites, bang bang salmon, salmon bites
                  Servings: 4 servings
                  Calories: 230kcal
                  Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

                  Ingredients

                  • ½ cup mayonnaise or light mayonnaise
                  • 3 tablespoons sweet chili sauce
                  • 3 tablespoons low sodium soy sauce
                  • 2 teaspoons rice vinegar
                  • 2 teaspoons garlic powder
                  • 2 teaspoons hot sauce of your choice* (I prefer Sriracha but you could also use Tabasco, Tapatio, Cholula, Nando's Peri Peri, etc.)
                  • 1 pound skinless salmon, cut into 1-inch bites
                  • 4 green onions, sliced
                  • 1 teaspoon sesame seeds
                  instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

                  Instructions

                  • In a large bowl, mix together mayonnaise, sweet chili sauce, soy sauce, rice vinegar, garlic powder, and hot sauce. Reserve half of the sauce in another small bowl for later. (The sauce makes 1 cup total so you'll want to add about ½ cup over the salmon bites.)
                  • Add salmon cubes to the same large bowl and toss to coat in the bang bang sauce.
                    Optional but recommended: Let salmon marinate in the sauce for up to 30 minutes. 
                  • Preheat air fryer to 375ºF. If your air fryer doesn't have a preheat option, simply let heat at 375ºF for 2 minutes.
                  • Use tongs to add salmon cubes to the air fryer basket, letting any excess sauce drip off before placing in basket. Discard the excess marinade sauce.
                    Quick tip: Before placing the salmon cubes in the basket, I recommend placing over an air fryer parchment liner if you have it. It makes for easier clean up!
                  • Let salmon cook for 8-10 minutes, until golden brown on top. Garnish with green onions, sesame seeds, and desired amount of reserved bang bang sauce.

                  Video

                  Notes

                  Hot Sauce Note: Feel free to add 2-3 more teaspoons of hot sauce if you prefer a spicier sauce. If you prefer a very mild sauce, you can omit the hot sauce altogether.
                  Salmon Note: This recipe calls for skinless salmon, but you could definitely keep the skin on too–it will get nice and crispy! Salmon skin has similar nutrients to the meaty part of the filet and actually has a higher concentration of omega-3s. If you’re not a fan of the salmon skin, you can buy skinless filets or carefully remove it with a sharp knife.
                  Serving Suggestions: Read the blog post above for serving suggestions like cauliflower rice and air fried broccoli!

                  Nutrition

                  Serving: 1serving | Calories: 230kcal | Carbohydrates: 12g | Protein: 21g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 990mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 6g

                  save this salmon bites recipe on pinterest:

                  Bang bang salmon made in the air fryer

                  Want more? Try these other salmon recipes:

                  • Nut Crusted Salmon
                  • Honey Soy Salmon
                  • Garlic Dill Salmon Packets

                  Lentil Brown Rice Dry Soup Mix (printable recipe card included!)

                  December 22, 2022 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 6 Comments

                  This Lentil Brown Rice Dry Soup Mix is the perfect, plant-based meal to serve on a chilly night. This shelf stable mix also makes a unique, affordable, and thoughtful gift that friends and family will love! Get the FREE printable recipe card down below!

                  Dry Soup MIx new 2

                  This post was first published on November 7, 2019. It was updated on December 20, 2024 to include new photos and helpful tips.

                  Table of Contents

                  • Why you'll love this dry soup mix
                  • Is this recipe healthy?
                  • This dry soup is a perfect holiday gift
                  • Click here to download a copy of this printable recipe card!
                  • What ingredients do I need for this dry soup mix?
                  • How do you make dry soup mix?
                    • 1. Add all your dry ingredients
                    • 2. Include additional ingredients
                    • 3. Attach recipe card
                    • 4. Cook now or later
                  • Recipe tips and tricks
                  • Customize it your way
                  • Pack on the veggies
                  • Does this recipe have protein?
                  • How long can this dry soup mix be stored for?
                  • Can I use different spices?
                  • What jar should I use?
                  • How do I store leftovers?
                  • Try these other plant-based soup recipes too:
                    • save this lentil brown rice soup recipe on pinterest:

                  Why you'll love this dry soup mix

                  Before I became a registered dietitian nutritionist (RDN), I had to complete a dietetic internship. During my internship, I had so much fun developing this recipe for a health fair reaching thousands in the local community. People stopping through our booth had the chance to create their own dry soup mix and measure out the ingredients in this interactive event. 

                  You can do the same at home. Simply grab your dry ingredients and measure them out into a baggie or mason jar. This is a great recipe or have on hand for an easy, one pot dinner.

                  This Lentil Brown Rice Soup is the perfect, plant-based meal to serve on a chilly night. This dry soup mix also makes for a unique, affordable, and thoughtful holiday gift that friends and family will love! Free printable recipe card included! #souprecipes #drysoup #holidaygift #vegan #glutenfree

                  Is this recipe healthy?

                  This Lentil Brown Rice Dry Soup Mix is packed with plant-based protein and fiber, making it a satisfying meal that supports digestive health. Lentils are rich in iron, an essential mineral that helps maintain energy levels, while brown rice provides complex carbohydrates for sustained energy. Plus, it's low in fat and full of natural goodness-perfect for a wholesome, balanced diet!

                  This dry soup is a perfect holiday gift

                  During the holidays, we are often overloaded with sugary treats and processed snacks. While these can all be part of a balanced diet, it can be refreshing to mix it up and gift something a little different. Simply print out the recipe card below and attach it to your jar with a cute bow. Jars are also a great option because they are reusable so there's no waste.

                  Click here to download a copy of this printable recipe card!

                  Dry Soup mix in mason jar
                  Dry Soup mix printable recipe card

                  What ingredients do I need for this dry soup mix?

                  This mix calls for simple pantry ingredients like split peas, rice, lentils, and spices. It's likely you already these items hanging in your pantry. If not, I recommend shopping the bulk section of the store. I'll always bring my Lotus Sustainables Mesh Bags to the store for a zero-waste, zero-plastic shopping experience.

                  Bulk pantry ingredients in Lotus bags

                  How do you make dry soup mix?

                  This mix calls for simple pantry ingredients you likely already have on hand. Here's how to make it:

                  1. Add all your dry ingredients

                  Layer your dry ingredients into a pint sized zip top bag or pint sized (16 ounce) mason jar. It fun to see the variety of color in clear jars!

                  2. Include additional ingredients

                  This recipe calls for an optional can of tomatoes, onion, and extra veggies. I find this makes the soup more flavorful so I recommend gifting or cooking with these.

                  Dry Soup MIx new 7
                  Dry Soup MIx new 9

                  3. Attach recipe card

                  When gifting or storing this dry soup mix for later, include the recipe card with it for cooking instructions. You can print the recipe card HERE. I also love to add a cute ribbon or bow before gifting.

                  Dry Soup MIx new 6
                  Dry Soup MIx new 8

                  4. Cook now or later

                  If you're making this dry soup mix for yourself, you can store and cook whenever you're ready. Simply add over water and simmer until cooked through.

                  Dry Soup MIx new 10

                  Recipe tips and tricks

                  • Serving: Serve this hearty soup with a side of crusty whole-grain bread or a simple mixed greens salad for a complete meal. Pair it with your favorite sparkling water or herbal tea for a cozy, refreshing touch.
                  • Troubleshooting: If the soup is too thick, simply add a splash of water or vegetable broth while reheating.
                  • Scaling: If you have a larger jar, feel free to double this recipe. You'll just use 16 cups of water so make sure you have a large 12+ quart pot.

                  Customize it your way

                  Like all of my other recipes, this Lentil Brown Rice Dry Soup Mix is completely customizable. You get to choose what additional ingredients you want to use!

                  • Protein boost: Add diced tofu, cooked shredded chicken, or even a handful of chickpeas.
                  • Spice it up: Feel free to mix in cayenne pepper, smoked paprika, or your favorite seasoning blend.
                  • Vegetable variety: Toss in chopped spinach, carrots, or zucchini for extra nutrition and color.
                  Dry Soup MIx new 2

                  Pack on the veggies

                  Although it's optional, I like to sauté diced onions and tomatoes before adding the dry ingredients to boost the color and flavor. Skip this step in the directions if you choose to omit the tomatoes and onion.

                  Don't be afraid to make this soup your own and add in any of your favorite veggies. Any kind of fresh, frozen, or canned vegetables are all welcome in this recipe. Broccoli, carrots, corn, cauliflower, zucchini, or red peppers are good examples of vegetables that would be great to add. If you are adding in any extra vegetables, throw them into the pot right before adding the water and letting the soup simmer.

                  If you want to stick with dry ingredients, you could purchase dehydrated vegetables and add those into the dry soup mix. 

                  Does this recipe have protein?

                  I love the combination of lentils and split peas because they provide great flavor, satisfying protein, and a creamy texture. Just 2 cups of this soup packs in 15 grams of plant-based protein for under 300 calories!

                  However, if you're missing the meat, ground beef, sausage, or chicken breast would also work nicely in this recipe. You could also add in a sprinkle of cheese, nutritional yeast, or bacon bits to amp up the protein even more.

                  Dry Soup MIx new
                  Dry Soup Mix 3

                  How long can this dry soup mix be stored for?

                  This dry soup mix will last in the pantry for up to one year. Once cooked, this soup will last up to 4 days in the fridge. Since this recipe makes a lot, you can also freeze any soup leftovers for up to 4 months.

                  Can I use different spices?

                  Like all my other recipes, you can certainly customize this recipe any way to want. For this recipe, I'm using a beautiful array of garlic, parsley, and Italian seasoning. Herbs and spices are great for adding major flavor without extra calories or sodium. Feel free to sprinkle in other spices like cayenne pepper, cilantro, or bay leaves.

                  What jar should I use?

                  For this dry soup mix, I recommend using a 16-ounce glass mason jar or larger with a tight-fitting lid to keep the ingredients fresh and neatly layered. It also makes for a beautiful presentation if you're gifting the mix! Sometimes I'll even upcycle an old Farmer's Fridge jar!

                  Dry Soup MIx new 4
                  Dry Soup MIx new 5

                  How do I store leftovers?

                  Store leftovers in an airtight container for up to 4 days in the fridge. For longer storage, transfer the soup to freezer-safe containers and freeze for up to 3 months. When reheating, thaw the soup in the fridge overnight, then warm it on the stove or in the microwave, stirring occasionally for even heating.

                  This Lentil Brown Rice Soup is the perfect, plant-based meal to serve on a chilly night. This dry soup mix also makes for a unique, affordable, and thoughtful holiday gift that friends and family will love! Free printable recipe card included! #souprecipes #drysoup #holidaygift #vegan #glutenfree

                  Try these other plant-based soup recipes too:

                  • Toasted Tomato Basil Soup
                  • Tuscan Kale & Farro Soup
                  • Or check out these 20 delicious vegan soups!
                  Bowl of lentil soup with gold spoon
                  Dry Soup Mix Mason Jar 2 scaled
                  Print Recipe
                  4.41 from 25 votes

                  Lentil Brown Rice Dry Soup Mix

                  This Lentil Brown Rice Soup is the perfect, plant-based meal to serve on a chilly night. This dry soup mix also makes for a unique, affordable, and thoughtful gift that friends and family will love!
                  Prep Time5 minutes mins
                  Cook Time40 minutes mins
                  Total Time45 minutes mins
                  Keyword: DIY gift, dry soup mix, gift, gluten free, holiday, lentils, one pot, vegan
                  Servings: 6 servings
                  Calories: 285kcal
                  Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

                  Equipment

                  • 16 ounce wide mouth mason jar

                  Ingredients

                  Dry Soup Mix Ingredients:

                  • 1 cup lentils of your choice (green or brown lentils will stay more intact at the end of the cook time. You can also use red lentils to get a creamier, more broken down lentil texture.)
                  • ½ cup uncooked brown rice
                  • ½ cup green split peas
                  • 1 tablespoon Italian seasoning
                  • 1 tablespoon dried parsley
                  • 1 tablespoon garlic powder
                  • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
                  • 2 large vegetable bouillon cubes - each cube should be equivalent to 1 tablespoon of granulated bouillon
                  • 8 cups water

                  Optional Ingredients:

                  • 1 medium yellow onion, diced
                  • 1 tablespoon oil of your choice (olive oil, avocado oil, etc.)
                  • 1-14.5 ounce can no salt added diced tomatoes
                  • 2 cups chopped vegetables of your choice (carrots, celery, bell peppers, etc.)
                  • Crusty bread and Parmesan cheese, for serving
                  instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

                  Instructions

                  Dry Soup Mix Instructions:

                  • Add all dry soup mix ingredients to a pint sized (16 ounce) wide mouth mason jar. Gift or enjoy within one year.

                  Cooking Instructions to Attach to Jar:

                  • Optional but recommended*: Sauté onion in oil in a large stock pot (~7 quarts) over high heat for 3 minutes. Add can of diced tomatoes and chopped vegetables.
                  • Add dry soup ingredients and 8 cups of water to the same large stock pot. Bring the mixture to a boil over high heat. Lower the heat and simmer for 40-45 minutes, covered with a lid. Taste and adjust seasonings if necessary.
                  • Serve with crusty bread and Parmesan cheese, if desired.
                  • Store any leftovers in the fridge for up to 4 days or freeze for up to 4 months.

                  Video

                  Notes

                  *I like to gift this dry soup mix with an onion and 1 can of diced tomatoes. However, if you are not including the onion and diced tomatoes, skip the step of sauteing the onion.
                  Grab the free printable tag to attach to your mason jar gift here!
                  If you don't have boullion cubes on hand, substitute the 8 cups of water for 8 cups of vegetable broth.

                  Nutrition

                  Serving: 2cups | Calories: 285kcal | Carbohydrates: 50g | Protein: 15g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 460mg | Fiber: 17g | Sugar: 5g

                  save this lentil brown rice soup recipe on pinterest:

                  Dry Soup Mix - save on Pinterest

                  Grilled Cheese and Tomato Soup

                  December 1, 2022 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

                  Grilled cheese and tomato soup is a classic combo to enjoy throughout the colder months. This comfort food is elevated with ingredients like fire roasted tomatoes and sliced cheese of your choice.

                  Grilled Cheese and Tomato Soup on white backdrop

                  This post has been sponsored by Pacific Coast Producers. All opinions are my own; I never feature a brand that I don't love! See my disclosure policy for more details.

                  Where did grilled cheese and tomato soup come from?

                  Grilled cheese likely dates way back, but some mention this combo became popular in foodservice when they were looking to add a bit of extra vitamin C to grilled cheese. Therefore, they decided to serve it with tomato soup!

                  Is grilled cheese and tomato soup healthy?

                  As a dietitian, my nutrition philosophy is all about balance. By pairing grilled cheese and tomato soup together, you get the delicious crunch from the crusty bread and protein from the cheese. Then, the fire roasted tomato soup provides a creamy texture loaded with nutrients like vitamin C and potassium. To create the soup, we're using affordable and sustainable canned tomatoes!

                  Dripping grilled cheese into creamy tomato soup

                  How should you choose canned tomatoes?

                  When you walk down the canned tomatoes aisle, it can be pretty overwhelming with all the different options available. You'll find both national brands and the store brands. I typically stick with the private label or store brand options because they are more affordable while still being high quality! You'll even find that grocery store specific brands offer organic versions that are usually less costly than national brands.

                  Here are a few examples of ones you may find at your local grocery store:

                  • Whole Foods - 365 Brand
                  • Kroger - Simple Truth Brand
                  • Natural Grocers Brand

                  What are fire roasted tomatoes?

                  For a flavorful spin on regular tomato soup, I'm using canned fire roasted tomatoes as the star. Did you know canneds foods are sustainable, affordable, and high in nutrients? Read more about the advantages of canned foods here!

                  Many people think fire roasted tomatoes are spicy-I know I thought this at first too! However, they are just regular tomatoes that have been charred over an open flame before they are canned. This allows them to have more of a smokey, caramelized flavor. 

                  Fire roasted tomatoes have the skin left on too. This allows them to have extra fiber and other functional nutrients like lycopene, potassium, and calcium.

                  You'll find fire roasted tomatoes whole, diced, and crushed-making them super versatile. In fact, in any recipe that calls for regular tomatoes, you can swap 1:1 for fire roasted tomatoes!

                  Learn about fire roasted tomatoes 101

                  What recipes should I use fire roasted tomatoes for? 

                  Here's some ideas of recipes you can use fire roasted tomatoes in:

                  • One Pot Vegetable Curry (simply swap diced tomatoes for diced fire roasted tomatoes!)
                  • Cheeseburger Pie
                  • One Pot Tomato Basil Pasta (simply swap diced tomatoes for diced fire roasted tomatoes!)
                  • Tomato Bruschetta (simply swap diced tomatoes for diced fire roasted tomatoes!)
                  • Huevos Rancheros
                  • Or this creamy Fire Roasted Tomato Soup! 
                  Tomato soup with splash of cream

                  How do you make this tomato soup?

                  The star of the show for this recipe combo is our homemade soup made with canned fire roasted tomatoes. It's super easy to make and delicious served with the grilled cheese. Here's how to make it:

                  1. Cook the veggies and aromatics

                  This soup uses tons of aromatic ingredients like carrots, celery, garlic, tomato paste, and Italian seasoning. Saute these ingredients to release more flavor before adding over the liquid ingredients. 

                  Ingredients on white background

                  2. Add the canned tomatoes

                  This recipe makes a smaller amount (about 5 cups) so we are using just 1 - 28 ounce can of fire roasted tomatoes. You'll pour over the tomatoes along with broth. You can even make your own homemade broth from scraps if desired!

                  3. Blend until smooth

                  If you have an immersion blender, it makes clean-up a breeze. Simply blend the soup in the same pot until everything is smooth. 

                  If not, transfer to a blender and blend until smooth. Be sure to firmly hold the lid on top while blending. Sometimes the heat can cause the lid to pop off. 

                  If you don't have an immersion blender or a regular blender, you could also skip the blending and enjoy as is. It will have more of a chunkier, vegetable soup consistency. 

                  4. Stir in milk or cream

                  After blending, stir in a splash of milk or heavy cream to give it a lovely silky texture and pop of color. 

                  Celery, onion, and carrots cooking
                  Fire roasted tomatoes added to pot
                  Immersion blender soup recipe
                  Adding heavy cream to tomato soup

                  How do you make grilled cheese?

                  Grilled cheese is simple to make but there are certain tips to really make it shine. Let's break it down:

                  1. Butter the bread

                  This recipe makes 2 sandwiches total. Of course, feel free to make more as needed.

                  Lay out all 4 pieces of bread and butter ONE side. Be generous here and get all corners-using enough butter creates that beautiful even browning. 

                  If you store your butter in the fridge or your home is cold, the butter may be too hard to spread. Spreading hard butter on the bread could rip it. If your butter is hard, I recommend softening it in the microwave for 10 second intervals. 

                  2. Add cheese

                  Flip the buttered side over and add two pieces of cheese per sandwich.

                  3. Assemble

                  Assemble the grilled cheese so the cheese is in the middle and the buttered sides are facing outwards. 

                  4. Cook each side

                  Add your sandwich to a heated pan and cook for 3-4 minutes per side. Use a spatula to help you carefully flip the grilled cheese. 

                  4 pieces of bread on cutting board
                  One side of bread buttered
                  2 slices of cheese added to bread
                  Uncooked sandwich
                  Grilled cheese cooked in black pan

                  Did you know you can turn grilled cheese into croutons?

                  If you're not feeling like dipping your sandwich into the soup, try cutting the grilled cheese into 1-inch cubes. They then work like croutons and are perfect sprinkled on top… yum! 

                  Grilled cheese croutons

                  Customize it your way

                  Like all of my other recipes, this tomato soup and grilled cheese is completely customizable. 

                  • Cheese of your choice - White or sharp cheddar cheese are my favorites but use any kind you like. This is also a great way to use up any leftover charcuterie cheese!
                  • Broth of your choice - Vegetable or chicken broth pair perfectly with this soup. You could also use a chicken or beef bone broth for extra protein. 
                  • Heavy cream or whole milk - We've tested both variations and they are equally delicious! Whole milk gives a thinner consistency whereas heavy cream makes it feel more like a comfort food soup.  

                  Is this recipe vegan? 

                  This recipe is 100% vegetarian! However, this recipe is not vegan because it uses butter, cheese, and milk which are dairy products. To make it vegan friendly, swap out the following:

                  • Butter -> vegan butter spread
                  • Cheese -> vegan cheese
                  • Milk -> plain coconut milk

                  Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

                  In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

                  Grilled Cheese and Tomato Soup 15 scaled
                  Print Recipe
                  5 from 2 votes

                  Grilled Cheese and Tomato Soup

                  Grilled cheese and tomato soup is a classic combo to enjoy throughout the colder months. This comfort food is elevated with ingredients like fire roasted tomatoes and sliced cheese of your choice.
                  Prep Time10 minutes mins
                  Cook Time20 minutes mins
                  Total Time30 minutes mins
                  Course: Main Dish Choices
                  Cuisine: American
                  Keyword: fire roasted tomatoes, grilled cheese, tomato soup
                  Servings: 2 servings (~2 ½ cups of soup & 1 sandwich per serving)
                  Calories: 650kcal
                  Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

                  Equipment

                  • Fire Roasted Tomatoes
                  • Tomato Paste
                  • Vegetable Broth

                  Ingredients

                  Tomato Soup

                  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
                  • ½ cup onion, diced
                  • 1 small carrot, sliced
                  • 1 celery stalk, sliced
                  • 1 tablespoon garlic
                  • 1 tablespoon tomato paste
                  • 1 tablespoon Italian seasoning
                  • 1 - 28 ounce can fire roasted tomatoes
                  • 1 cup broth of your choice (vegetable or chicken broth)
                  • ¼ cup whole milk or heavy cream

                  Grilled Cheese:

                  • 2 tablespoons butter, softened or melted
                  • 4 large slices sourdough or rustic bread
                  • 4 thick cut sliced cheese of your choice (sharp cheddar, white cheddar, american, etc.)
                  instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

                  Instructions

                  Tomato Soup Instructions:

                  • In a large pot, heat olive oil over medium high heat. Add over onion, carrots, and celery. Saute for 5 minutes until slightly browned. 
                  • Add over garlic, tomato paste, and Italian seasoning and saute for 1 minute.
                  • Add over fire roasted tomatoes and broth and let simmer for 5 minutes with the lid on to avoid splatter.
                  • Blending soup: If you have an immersion blender, blend the soup on low until it reaches a smooth texture. Alternatively, you can transfer soup to a blender and blend on low until it reaches a smooth texture. If using a regular blender, be sure to firmly hold the lid on top while blending. 
                  • After blending, stir in whole milk or heavy cream. 
                  • Keep warm until ready to serve with grilled cheese.
                  • Store any leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days.

                  Grilled Cheese Instructions:

                  • Butter one side of each slice of bread. On the unbuttered side, add over 2 slices of cheese per sandwich. Put bread together (with buttered sides facing outward) to make 2 sandwiches total. See blog post above for step-by-step photo instructions.
                  • Heat large pan to medium heat. Once hot, add over sandwiches and cook for 3-4 minutes per side to give it that nice golden brown crust. 
                  • Serve the grilled cheese sandwiches with prepared tomato soup.*

                  Notes

                  *Note: You can turn your grilled cheese into croutons by cutting into 1-inch cubes. Then, sprinkle over your tomato soup!

                  Nutrition

                  Calories: 650kcal | Carbohydrates: 60g | Protein: 20g | Fat: 34g | Saturated Fat: 18g | Sodium: 990mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 19g

                  save this grilled cheese and tomato soup recipe on pinterest:

                  Grilled Cheese and Tomato Soup-save on Pinterest!

                  Healthy Ramen Noodles

                  November 29, 2022 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

                  These Healthy Ramen Noodles are the perfect make ahead lunch. Simply add all your ingredients to a mason jar, store in the fridge, and add boiling water over top when you're ready to eat! Vegan-friendly and packed with plant-based protein.

                  Gold fork full of ramen noodles

                  Disclosure: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. Thanks so much for your support! See my disclosure policy for more details.

                  This post was first published on April 27, 2021. It was updated on November 29, 2022.

                  Is ramen healthy?

                  The first thing that probably comes to mind when you think of ramen is the heavily processed packages enjoyed by college students around the world. These flavored packages are filled with high amounts of sodium and a long list of ingredients you can't pronounce.

                  On the other hand, when it comes to ramen noodles themselves, they are made from just 4 ingredients-flour, water, salt, and kansui. So in short, unflavored ramen noodles are definitely a food to enjoy as part of a balanced diet. Plus, to pump up the nutrition even more, we're pairing these noodles with colorful, fiber-rich vegetables in these make-ahead jars.

                  What nutrients are in ramen noodles?

                  Since ramen is made from wheat, it's actually a decent source of protein and fiber. One 60 gram package of plain ramen noodles contains around 200 calories, 4 grams of fiber, and 7 grams of protein. There's also zero cholesterol and zero added sugar.

                  Layered jar with edamame, kale, and ramen

                  What are low sodium ramen options?

                  For this recipe, choose a package of ramen noodles that contains plain ramen noodles without any flavoring. This helps keep the sodium to a minimum.

                  • One of my favorites to use is this box of Ocean's Halo Organic Ramen Noodles. These noodles contain 3 simple ingredients, lower amounts of sodium, and pack in 7 grams of protein per serving.
                  • I also enjoy Mike's Mighty Good Ramen because the noodles are steamed, not fried. You can use their lower sodium seasoning packets, or just enjoy the noodles themselves.

                  What to make with ramen noodles

                  You can enjoy ramen noodles alone, but they are best served with other ingredients like veggies, crunchy aromatics, and sauce. Try adding them into an easy 6-ingredient stir fry, enjoying as a cozy soup bowl, or make these meal prep jar noodles.

                  Plain ramen noodles in mason jar
                  Water poured over low sodium ramen

                  How do you make these healthier ramen noodles?

                  These healthy ramen noodles contain clean ingredients you can feel good about eating. Plus, they are so simple to make. You'll need 4 - 16 ounce wide mouth mason jars to create this recipe. If you don't have these, you can also use another jar similar in size.

                  • Start by layering the jars with edamame, sauce, and ginger knobs. Edamame is a great source of plant based protein with about 9 grams of protein per 3 ounces. 
                  • Then, add in your vegetables and vegetable broth cube. Make sure your vegetables are chopped into bite sized pieces. You can use any veggies you like best!
                  • Finally, add over 1 package of ramen noodles. Ramen is typically formed into cakes so you will likely need to break it up into smaller pieces to fit into the jar. Again, I love using this box of Ocean's Halo Organic Ramen Noodles which comes in 4 individually wrapped ramen servings- perfect to split among the 4 jars. 

                  When it comes time to make the noodles, simply pour over boiling water and let sit for a few minutes to cook the noodles. If you find that the ramen is still hard, you can microwave the jar (without the metal lid) for an additional 1-2 minutes.

                  Looking down on jar with ramen noodles and edamame

                  Customize it your way

                  Like all of my other recipes, this healthy ramen recipe is completely customizable.

                  • Use any quick-cooking vegetables of your choice. This is perfect to use up any remaining bits of veggies in your fridge. 
                  • Make this recipe gluten-free- instead of using ramen noodles use rice vermicelli noodles and use tamari in place of soy sauce.
                  • You can also change up the sauces and seasonings depending on what you like best. Sauces like teriyaki or sweet chili sauce would go great in these noodles jars. To kick up the spice, add over more Sriracha and red pepper flakes.
                  • If you're wanting to cut down on the sodium, take out the vegetable bouillon cube and be sure to use low sodium soy sauce.

                  Looking for more customizable recipes made for you and your health goals? Click here to learn more about my coaching + cooking program.

                  Healthy Ramen Jars 3
                  Print Recipe
                  4.41 from 30 votes

                  Healthy Ramen Noodles in a Jar

                  These Healthy Ramen Noodles are the perfect make ahead lunch. Simply add all your ingredients to a mason jar and add boiling water over top when you're ready to eat!
                  Prep Time10 minutes mins
                  Cook Time5 minutes mins
                  Total Time15 minutes mins
                  Course: Main Dish Choices
                  Cuisine: Asian
                  Keyword: healthy lunch, make ahead, mason jar, ramen
                  Servings: 4 noodle jars
                  Calories: 340kcal
                  Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

                  Equipment

                  • Vegetable Bouillon Cubes
                  • Plain Ramen Noodles
                  • 16 ounce Wide Mouth Mason Jars

                  Ingredients

                  • 1 - 12 ounce bag shelled edamame
                  • 4 teaspoons low sodium soy sauce
                  • 4 teaspoons Sriracha
                  • 4 small knobs ginger, peeled
                  • 1 teaspoon red pepper flakes
                  • 2 cups vegetables of your choice, chopped (broccoli, carrots, bell peppers, spinach, cabbage, kale, green onions, etc)
                  • 2 vegetable bouillon cubes, cut in half
                  • 4 individually wrapped plain ramen cakes, from a ~10 ounce package - see recommended product below
                  instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

                  Instructions

                  • Divide 3 ounces (about ½ cup) edamame among 4 - 16 ounce wide mouth mason jars. Then, add 1 teaspoon of soy sauce, 1 teaspoon of Sriracha, 1 small knob ginger, and ¼ teaspoon red pepper flakes to each jar.
                  • Layer in ½ cup vegetables to each jar, then drop in ½ bouillon cube. Finish by adding 1 package of ramen into each jar. Keep in the fridge with the lid on for up to 4 days until ready to eat.
                  • About a half hour before you want to eat, remove the jar from the fridge and let it come to room temperature. (If you pour boiling water into a cold jar, the glass may crack.)
                  • Pour boiling water to fill jar and stir contents. Let the jar sit with the lid on for 3-4 minutes before serving. Pour into a large bowl to eat.

                  Video

                  Nutrition

                  Serving: 1jar | Calories: 340kcal | Carbohydrates: 55g | Protein: 20g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 900mg | Fiber: 6g

                  save this healthy ramen noodles recipe on pinterest:

                  These Healthy Ramen Noodles are the perfect make ahead lunch. Simply add all your ingredients to a mason jar and pour boiling water over top!

                  Check out these other make-ahead mason jar recipes too:

                  • Mason Jar Yogurt Parfaits
                  • Rainbow Quinoa Salad Jars
                  • Lentil Brown Rice Dry Soup Mix

                  Bean Curry (Lubya Afghan Curry)

                  November 18, 2022 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN 1 Comment

                  Time to cozy up to the most delicious Afghan style curry known as Lubya! This bean curry includes kidney beans or other beans of your choice as the star! It takes only 30 minutes to make and requires just one pan. Plus, it's packed with satiating fiber and plant-based protein.

                  Kidney beans and black beans in a curry stew

                  Disclosure: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. Thanks so much for your support! See my disclosure policy for more details.

                  Table of Contents

                  • What is Lubya?
                  • How can I support Afghanistan? 
                  • What beans are used for this bean curry? 
                  • Is bean curry healthy?
                  • How do you make Lubya?
                    • 1. First, toast your spices.
                    • 2. Then, caramelize your onion.
                    • 3. Next, add your tomatoes.
                    • 4. Finally, add over your beans.
                  • What should I serve with this bean curry? 
                  • Need more hands-on help with recipes?
                    • Want more Afghan cuisine inspo? Try these other recipes:
                  • save this kidney bean curry recipe on pinterest:

                  This post was first published on October 18, 2021. It was updated on January 12, 2024 with more helpful information and a video demonstrating how to make this bean curry.

                  What is Lubya?

                  In light of the recent events going on in Afghanistan, we were inspired to do some further research into Afghan cuisine. For us, food feels like a common point of connection and perhaps can allow for common ground with someone met from this background. 

                  During my research and education, I came across Lubya, also sometimes referred to as Lubia or Lobia. It's a type of curry filled with fresh spices, tomatoes, and beans.

                  After rounds of recipe testing, we perfected this recipe which is absolutely delicious and has become a weekly staple in our household. If you're in need of an easy and cozy kidney bean recipe, give this curry a try!

                  How can I support Afghanistan? 

                  Although cooking this Lubya curry may not have a direct impact, food always seems to be a common piece of joy to connect over. 

                  If you are interested in learning more about how you can help Afghanistan and refugees, here are a few ways you can take action. We would also urge you to do more research on your own to see if you are aligned with other types of resources!

                  • Call on Congress to Provide Resources for Refugee Resettlement
                  • Host a stay on Airbnb
                  • Donate to the HIAS which helps refugees arriving in the U.S.
                  • Donate to the IRC which helps families in Afghanistan 
                  • Volunteer to help Afghan families near you
                  Grabbing a spoonful of Lubya

                  What beans are used for this bean curry? 

                  Red kidney beans are traditional to Lubya but with Cheerful Choices being all about customizable recipes, you can customize this one too. Try using any beans of your choice like...

                  • Black beans
                  • Cannellini beans
                  • Garbanzo beans (also called chickpeas)
                  • Pinto beans

                  Since it calls for 2 cans of beans, you could even mix and match with two different types of beans. My favorite combination is one can of red kidney beans and one can of black beans as pictured. 

                  Is bean curry healthy?

                  Absolutely! Beans are a great addition to your diet because they are high in soluble fiber and plant-based protein. Among many other benefits, research shows that soluble fiber may help decrease fat around the waist. This bean curry is also filled with 12 grams of protein per serving, allowing us to feel fuller longer.

                  This curry is brimming with tons of spices and aromatics which pack in bright flavor without added calories. If you're watching your sodium intake, feel free to swap the beans and broth with their low-sodium versions. 

                  If you're craving more of a coconut milk curry, check out this other curry recipe.

                  How do you make Lubya?

                  This recipe is super simple to make-let's break it down.

                  IMG 8193

                  1. First, toast your spices.

                  This step is optional but we find it adds more flavor. To toast whole spices, add them to a dry pan and heat until they are slightly golden and start smelling aromatic. Then transfer to mortar and pestle or spice grinder and grind until broken down.

                  If you don't have whole spices or the tools to break down whole spices-no worries. Just throw in the same amount of the ground spice later on. For example, when the recipe calls for "1 tablespoon whole coriander seeds", you can swap for 1 tablespoon ground coriander.

                  Whole cumin seeds in mortar and pestle
                  Ground cumin seeds in mortar and pestle

                  2. Then, caramelize your onion.

                  Breaking down the onions like this will add a sweet flavor that's perfect in this curry. Feel free to use a red, yellow, or white onion.

                  3. Next, add your tomatoes.

                  To make things simple, we're using a can of diced tomatoes but you can also chop up whole tomatoes. If you're chopping it yourself, aim to add about 2 cups of tomatoes.

                  IMG 8203

                  4. Finally, add over your beans.

                  You can use red kidney beans (which are traditional to this Afghan curry) or another type of bean. It's totally customizable! Feel free to swap for another type of bean such as black beans, cannellini beans, garbanzo beans, pinto beans, or a mixture. We are using 2 cans of beans, which would be around 3 cups of cooked beans.

                  IMG 8211

                  What should I serve with this bean curry? 

                  Try serving this bean curry over basmati rice or naan bread. You can even make Lavash, an Afghan/Middle Eastern bread, to serve it with. We also love adding over a dollop of plain yogurt for some extra tanginess. If you're wanting to add in extra veggies, try serving with a mixed green salad, steamed broccoli, or air fried green beans.

                  Need more hands-on help with recipes?

                  In our Coaching + Cooking program, we help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen. Click here to learn more about this virtual program with a dietitian.

                  Bean curry in a large white bowl
                  Lubya edit scaled
                  Print Recipe
                  4.59 from 17 votes

                  Bean Curry (Lubya Afghan Curry)

                  This bean curry includes kidney beans or other beans of your choice as the star! Packed with toasted spices, tomatoes, and fresh herbs.
                  Prep Time10 minutes mins
                  Cook Time20 minutes mins
                  Total Time30 minutes mins
                  Course: Main Dish Choices
                  Cuisine: Afghan
                  Keyword: afghan recipe, bean curry, curry, lubya
                  Servings: 4 servings
                  Calories: 260kcal
                  Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

                  Ingredients

                  • 1 tablespoon whole coriander seeds *see note if you don't have whole spices
                  • 1 teaspoon whole cumin seeds
                  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
                  • 1 small onion of your choice, diced (red, yellow, or white)
                  • 3 cloves garlic, minced (about 1 tablespoon)
                  • 1- inch knob of ginger, grated (about 1 tablespoon)
                  • 1 - 15 ounce can diced tomatoes
                  • 1 teaspoon turmeric
                  • 1 teaspoon ground black pepper
                  • 1 teaspoon salt
                  • 2 - 15 ounce cans beans of your choice, drained and rinsed (Red kidney beans are traditional to this Afghan curry but you could use another type of bean such as black beans, cannellini beans, garbanzo beans, pinto beans, or a mixture)
                  • 1 cup vegetable broth
                  • Chopped cilantro, for garnish
                  • Naan bread and/or basmati rice, to serve
                  instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

                  Instructions

                  • Add spices to a large pan and toast over medium heat until slightly browned and aromatic, about 1-2 minutes. Transfer to mortar and pestle or spice grinder and grind until finely ground. Set aside for later. 
                  • To same pan, heat oil over medium heat. Add onion and cook until caramelized, about 5 minutes. 
                  • Add garlic and ginger and stir until onions are coated.
                  • Add over diced tomatoes as well as spices: ground coriander, ground cumin, turmeric, black pepper, and salt. Stir to combine and cook until slightly reduced, about 5 minutes.
                  • Add over beans and broth and stir to combine. Bring to a simmer then reduce to low heat. Cover and let simmer for 10 minutes.
                  • Sprinkle with cilantro and serve with naan bread and/or basmati rice.
                  • Store any leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.

                  Video

                  Notes

                  *A note on whole spices: If you don't have whole coriander or cumin seeds, feel free to skip step #1 and use the same amount of ground coriander and cumin later on in step #4.

                  Nutrition

                  Serving: 1serving | Calories: 260kcal | Carbohydrates: 37g | Protein: 12g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 770mg | Fiber: 10g | Sugar: 9g

                  Want more Afghan cuisine inspo? Try these other recipes:

                  • Aushak - Afghan Dumplings
                  • Bolani - Afghan Stuffed Flatbread
                  • Lavash - Afghan Bread

                  save this kidney bean curry recipe on pinterest:

                  Quick & cozy bean curry placed on a grey towel

                  Air Fryer Green Beans

                  November 14, 2022 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

                  Air fryer green beans are the easiest side dish you could ask for! They take just a few minutes to make with only 3 main ingredients. Plus, you get to customize the toppings your way. Perfect to add to your Thanksgiving or holiday table.

                  Air fryer green beans

                  Disclosure: This post may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you make a purchase through one of my links-at no extra cost to you. As always, all opinions are my own. Thanks so much for your support! See my disclosure policy for more details.

                  Table of Contents

                  • Are green beans healthy?
                    • How do I trim green beans?
                  • How do you make fresh green beans in the air fryer?
                    • Here's how to make it:
                  • Customize it your way
                    • Try these other topping ideas:
                    • How do you make caramelized onions?
                  • Can you make air fryer canned green beans?
                  • Need more hands-on help with recipes?
                    • Try these other side dishes too:
                    • save this air fryer green beans recipe on pinterest:

                  Are green beans healthy?

                  Absolutely! Green beans are packed with soluble fiber, vitamin A, and vitamin C. Studies show these nutrients can help support our immune system, which is especially important during the colder months. 

                  Plus, this side dish is going to be much lighter than most calorie-laden green bean casseroles. While all foods fit, simple swaps like this can help you stay healthy during the holidays.

                  Since we are using oil instead of butter, this recipe is also dairy-free and vegan. 

                  Ingredients on a white backdrop

                  How do I trim green beans?

                  Forget about individually snapping the green bean ends off. Instead, line up the ends on a bundle of washed green beans. Then, use a knife to trim about ½-inch off the ends. Repeat on the other side of the beans. 

                  Watch this video to see how it's done! 

                  Close up of greens beans in air fryer basket

                  How do you make fresh green beans in the air fryer?

                  Green beans are most commonly steamed or sautéed. These are definitely still great options, but I find cooking them in the air fryer creates more browning and crispiness. Plus, it's one less thing taking up stove space. 

                  This recipe is like a green bean almondine, but air fryer version.

                  Here's how to make it:

                  1. Combine all your ingredients in a large bowl. (If you're trying to save on dishes, you can mix all the ingredients together in your air fryer.)
                  2. Add green bean mixture to a preheated air fryer.
                  3. Cook for 6 minutes, shaking halfway through to promote even browning.
                  4. Top with toasted sliced almonds or any other toppings of your choice.
                  Green beans topped with sliced almonds

                  Customize it your way

                  Like all of my other recipes, these air fryer green beans are completely customizable. 

                  Feel free to add over any toppings of your choice. I typically like to add over toasted sliced almonds, but feel free to mix it up.

                  Try these other topping ideas:

                  • Toasted chopped walnuts
                  • Lemon juice
                  • Sesame seeds
                  • Red pepper flakes
                  • Bacon bits
                  • Goat cheese or parmesan cheese
                  • Caramelized onions
                  Topping options for the green beans

                  How do you make caramelized onions?

                  Start by thinly slicing your onions for even cooking, then heat a bit of oil or butter in a large skillet over medium heat. Add the onions and stir frequently to ensure they cook evenly without burning. After about 20-30 minutes, you'll see them soften and turn golden brown-when they're rich and caramelized, they're ready!

                  Caramelized onions

                  Can you make air fryer canned green beans?

                  I have also tested this recipe with canned green beans and although they definitely have a softer texture, it works too. For canned green beans, toss 1 can of drained and patted dry green beans with 1 teaspoon oil and 1 teaspoon garlic powder. Then, air fry them on a higher temperature of 400ºF for 10 minutes before tossing with 1 tablespoon of grated parmesan cheese. Then, air fry for 3 more minutes until slightly crispy on the ends and golden brown.

                  Crispy green beans in a white bowl

                  Need more hands-on help with recipes?

                  In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen. Click here to learn more about this virtual program with a dietitian.

                  Try these other side dishes too:

                  • Maple Roasted Squash Wedges 
                  • Greek Yogurt Mashed Potatoes
                  • Lemon Orzo with Asparagus
                  • Roasted Fall Vegetables with Aioli
                  • Air Fryer Corn Fritters
                  • Sheet Pan Green Beans with Sausage
                  Air fryer green beans square
                  Print Recipe
                  5 from 3 votes

                  Air Fryer Green Beans

                  These green beans are the easiest side dish! They only take a few minutes to make with customizable toppings.
                  Prep Time4 minutes mins
                  Cook Time6 minutes mins
                  Total Time6 minutes mins
                  Course: Appetizer & Side Dish Choices
                  Cuisine: American
                  Keyword: air fryer, green beans, holiday, side dish, thanksgiving
                  Servings: 4 servings
                  Calories: 70kcal
                  Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

                  Ingredients

                  • 12 ounces fresh green beans, rinsed and ends trimmed
                  • 1 tablespoon oil of your choice (avocado oil, olive oil, canola oil)
                  • 2 teaspoons garlic powder
                  • Salt and pepper, to taste
                  • Optional toppings of your choice (I like to use toasted sliced almonds. You could also top with toasted chopped walnuts, lemon juice, sesame seeds, red pepper flakes, bacon bits, goat cheese, parmesan cheese, caramelized onions, etc.)
                  instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

                  Instructions

                  • Preheat air fryer to 370ºF.
                  • In a large bowl, toss together green beans, oil, garlic powder, salt, and pepper until everything is evenly coated.
                  • Add to air fryer and cook for 6 minutes, shaking halfway through.
                  • Transfer to a serving platter and top with toasted sliced almonds or other toppings of choice, if desired.

                  Video

                  Nutrition

                  Serving: 1serving | Calories: 70kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 3g | Sodium: 150mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 3g

                  save this air fryer green beans recipe on pinterest:

                  Easy air fryer green beans

                  Chocolate Popcorn

                  November 10, 2022 by Mackenzie Burgess, RDN Leave a Comment

                  Stove top chocolate popcorn is super easy and a fun way to enjoy a better-for-you sweet treat. This recipe only takes 5 minutes to make with just 5 ingredients. It's perfect to have out during the holiday season for snacking!

                  Chocolate popcorn in a small white bowl

                  What is chocolate popcorn?

                  Chocolate popcorn is essentially just like it sounds-fresh popped corn covered in chocolate. For this recipe, we are using a small amount of dark chocolate and cocoa powder to lightly coat the popcorn. 

                  Is this recipe healthy?

                  Many store-bought chocolate covered popcorns are filled with tons of sugar and a long list of processed ingredients. Instead, this recipe uses 5 nourishing ingredients packed with antioxidants and fiber.

                  • Popcorn - Did you know ¼ cup of popcorn kernels contains around 7 grams of fiber? This fiber is important for our gut and heart health.
                  • Chocolate - The mixture of dark chocolate and cocoa powder both provide a type of phytonutrient called "flavonoids". Flavonoids act as antioxidants and have been shown to have heart health benefits. Since we are using a light sprinkling of chocolate chips, you can enjoy the benefits without packing on too many calories. For even more heart-health benefits, you can substitute the 1 tablespoon of cocoa powder with 1 scoop of CocoaVia.
                  Chocolate popcorn ingredients on white backdrop

                  How do you make chocolate popcorn?

                  Never made popcorn on the stove before? No worries! This recipe is super simple and comes together in no time. Here's your step-by-step guide to making fluffy popcorn with chocolate:

                  1. Start by heating up your oil

                  When making stove top popcorn, I recommend having your oil hot before adding in your kernels. This allows for more even popping. To test if your oil is hot, rotate your pan-the oil should easily glide around.

                  2. Add over your kernels

                  For this recipe, we are making a smaller amount of popcorn. However, if you are serving a large crowd, feel free to double all of the recipe amounts and use ½ cup of kernels. You'll just want to make sure to use a larger pot.

                  After you add over your kernels, it may take 1-2 minutes until the first kernel pops. Then, the rest of the kernels should start popping soon after

                  3. Wait for the kernels to stop popping

                  Just like microwave popcorn, you'll know it's done when a few seconds go by in between popping. For stove top popcorn, I find that when there is about 5-7 seconds with no popping sounds-it's done. You may find a few kernels that didn't pop, but most should have at this point.

                  4. Coat with chocolate

                  Before you even begin making your popcorn, make sure to have a large heat proof bowl or tupperware with a lid on standby. This is what we'll transfer the popcorn into. Then, while it's still piping hot-sprinkle over the chocolate chips, cocoa powder, and salt. Then, snap on your lid and give it a good shake. This will distribute the melted chocolate and cocoa powder throughout each kernel. 

                  If you don't have another bowl handy, you can add the chocolate and cocoa powder to your pot and use pot holders to shake the pot. Just note: this pot is very hot and could result in burnt popcorn or burnt chocolate. That's why I recommend transfering to a bowl first!

                  5. Freeze to harden

                  If you prefer a more crunchy chocolate consistency, transfer to the freezer for a few minutes to harden the melted chocolate.

                  Chocolate Popcorn Process 1
                  Chocolate Popcorn Process
                  Chocolate Popcorn Process 2
                  Chocolate Popcorn Process 3
                  Chocolate Popcorn Process 4

                  Customize it your way

                  Like all of my other recipes, this chocolate popcorn is completely customizable. You get to choose what oil and chocolate you want to use.

                  • Oil of your choice - I recommend choosing an oil with a high smoke point like avocado oil, olive oil, or butter. 
                  • Chocolate of your choice - For the most health benefits, choose 70% cocoa or higher. I find chocolate chips distribute best, but you could also chop your favorite chocolate bar into small pieces. If you're not a fan of dark chocolate, feel free to use milk or white chocolate.
                  Chocolate Popcorn 6 1

                  Can I add other popcorn toppings?

                  I'm all about the customizable add-ons! Although I don't specifically call for any toppings in the recipe, feel free to sprinkle on any favorites. Here are a few I'll often add on top for movie nights:

                  • Nuts of your choice - Cashews, honey roasted peanuts, and pecans are all delicious
                  • Natural Delights Dark Chocolate Truffles - If you enjoy adding M&Ms to your popcorn, you'll love adding over these miniature, candy-sized truffles
                  • Pretzels - Almost like a fun spin on chocolate covered pretzels
                  • RIND Snacks Dark Cocoa Sea Salt Coconut Crisps - super crispy and perfect healthy addition

                  How many does this recipe serve?

                  This recipe makes enough for about 4 people to have 2 cups of popcorn. If you're wanting to serve a large crowd, you can double the recipe. I've also made a large batch for just myself by cutting the recipe in half.

                  This chocolate popcorn is also ideal for holiday gifting. Make your popcorn fresh, add to small baggies, and gift away!

                  Chocolate Popcorn 5

                  Can I make this recipe ahead of time?

                  I recommend making this chocolate covered popcorn day of for the freshest flavor. However, you can also make it ahead of time and store in an airtight container for up to 3 days. 

                  Need more help with recipes for your busy schedule?

                  In my coaching + cooking program, I help busy people with beginner cooking knowledge become confident in the kitchen so that they can enjoy nourishing foods they love and stress less about mealtime. Click here to learn more about this virtual program led by a dietitian.

                  Want more holiday snacks? Try these other recipes:

                  • Gingerbread Mug Cake
                  • Avocado Truffles
                  • Edible Peanut Butter Cookie Dough
                  Chocolate Popcorn 6 2
                  Print Recipe
                  4 from 4 votes

                  Chocolate Popcorn

                  This recipe only takes 5 minutes to make with just 5 ingredients. It's perfect to have out during the holiday season for snacking!
                  Cook Time5 minutes mins
                  Course: Snack Choices
                  Cuisine: American
                  Keyword: chocolate covered popcorn, chocolate popcorn, healthy snack, holiday
                  Servings: 4 servings (~8 cups popped total)
                  Calories: 185kcal
                  Author: Mackenzie Burgess, RDN

                  Ingredients

                  • 2 tablespoons oil of your choice (avocado oil, olive oil, or ghee)
                  • ¼ cup popcorn kernels
                  • ¼ cup chocolate chips of your choice (I like to use dark chocolate but you could also use semi-sweet, milk, or white chocolate)
                  • 1 tablespoon unsweetened cocoa powder
                  • Salt, to taste
                  instacartGet Recipe Ingredients

                  Instructions

                  • Heat oil in a medium-sized pot over medium heat. 
                  • To test if the oil is hot enough for popping, add 3-4 popcorn kernels to the pot and cover with the lid.
                  • Wait for these test kernels to pop. This indicates that the oil has reached the optimal temperature for popping the rest of the popcorn.
                  • Once the test kernels have popped, quickly add the rest of the popcorn kernels to the pot and cover it with the lid.
                  • Using hot pads, occasionally shake the pot (with the lid on) to ensure the kernels pop evenly. This process typically takes about 3 minutes, and you'll know it's done when there is about 5-7 seconds between popping sounds.
                  • Once kernels stop popping, remove from heat and pour into large bowl or tupperware with a lid.
                  • Sprinkle over chocolate chips, cocoa powder, and salt to taste. Immediately cover with lid and shake hot popcorn to melt chocolate and evenly coat the kernels.
                  • Enjoy right away or transfer bowl to freezer for 5 minutes to harden chocolate.

                  Video

                  Notes

                  See popcorn toppings suggestions above (LINKED HERE)!

                  Nutrition

                  Serving: 1serving (2 cups) | Calories: 185kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Sodium: 40mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 3g

                  save this chocolate popcorn recipe on pinterest:

                  Pinterest Popcorn 1
                  • « Previous Page
                  • 1
                  • 2
                  • 3
                  • 4
                  • 5
                  • 6
                  • 7
                  • Next Page »

                  Hi, I'm Mackenzie!

                  Welcome to Cheerful Choices! Here you’ll find customizable recipes with ingredients “of your choice.” As a dietitian, I also help you gain kitchen confidence through my “Coaching + Cooking” program.

                  More about me

                  Meal Prep Ready

                  • Pistachio Lettuce Wraps 14 scaled
                    Meal Prep Chicken Lettuce Wraps with Pistachios
                  • Customizable Power Bowl Featured Image
                    Customizable Power Bowl Recipe Template
                  • Customizable Protein Pancakes Featured Image
                    Customizable Protein Pancakes
                  • One Pot Chickpea Pasta 13 scaled
                    One Pot Tomato Basil Pasta

                  Dietitian Pro Tips

                  • Meal Plan2
                    Your Guide to Setting SMART Nutrition Goals
                  • C49A4215
                    10 Immune Boosting Foods + Immunity Shot Recipe to Try
                  • Quinoa Kitchen Confidence
                    5 Tips to Improve Your Kitchen Confidence
                  • Vegetable Curry 4 scaled
                    How to Reuse Leftover Food

                  Footer

                  • Contact
                  • Shop
                  • Privacy Policy
                  • Terms
                  • ↑ back to top

                  Rate This Recipe

                  Your vote:




                  Let us know what you thought of this recipe:

                  Loved it! I customized this recipe by using...
                  My family loved this one!
                  Thank you for sharing this recipe, it was delicious!

                  Or write in your own words:

                  A rating is required
                  A name is required
                  An email is required